JP6753094B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball launched by a player enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, the game shifts to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to let them.

JP-A-2015-8813

However, in such a game machine, it is desired to improve the player's interest in the game.

In view of the above points, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing a player's interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, in the game machine described in the present invention, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area, a stage portion having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and the above-mentioned The first state that regulates the game ball launched toward the game area to flow down toward the game ball rolling surface, and the game ball regulated by the first state is the game ball rolling surface. It has a second state that can flow down toward, a regulating means that can be changed to, an operating means that can be operated by the player, and a variable controlling means that can variably control the regulating means, and is located in the gaming area. Is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls so that at least a part of the game balls launched toward the game area is guided to the regulation means, and the stage portion is provided with a distribution means for the game balls to roll. It has a movable first rolling surface and a second rolling surface, and at the boundary between the first rolling surface and the second rolling surface, the regulating means is changed to the second state. A regulation unit is arranged to regulate the flow of the game ball that has flowed down to the second rolling surface into the first rolling surface, and the game machine has flowed down without being restricted by the regulating means. When the regulating means changes from the first state to the second state at a predetermined timing when the game ball is rolling on the second rolling surface, the regulating means changes to the second state. By colliding the game ball that has flowed down to the rolling surface with the game ball that is rolling on the second rolling surface, the game ball that has flowed down without being regulated by the regulatory means is caused by the first rolling surface. The game ball that has flowed down from the first rolling surface is more likely to enter than the game ball that has flowed down from the second rolling surface. Based on this, it is easy to enter the ball entering means which can be given a privilege which is advantageous to the player, and the variable control means executes a specific operation on the operating means. In this case, the regulating means is variably controlled from the first state to the second state .

According to the game machine of the present invention, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area, a stage portion having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and a game area are launched. A first state that regulates the flow of the game ball toward the game ball rolling surface, and a first state in which the game ball regulated by the first state can flow down toward the game ball rolling surface. It has two states, a regulation means that can be changed to, an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a variable control means that can variably control the regulation means, and the game area is directed toward the game area. A distribution means for distributing the game ball is provided so that at least a part of the game ball launched is guided to the regulation means, and the stage portion is a first roll in which the game ball can roll. The second rolling surface has a surface and a second rolling surface, and at the boundary between the first rolling surface and the second rolling surface, the regulating means is changed to the second state. A regulation unit that regulates the flow of the game ball that has flowed down to the first rolling surface is arranged, and the game machine is not restricted by the regulation means, and the game ball that has flowed down is the second roll. When the regulating means is changed from the first state to the second state at a predetermined timing when the game ball is rolling on the moving surface, the regulating means flows down to the second rolling surface. By colliding the game ball with the rolling game ball on the second rolling surface, it is possible to allow the game ball that has flowed down without being regulated by the regulating means to flow into the first rolling surface. The game ball that has flowed down below the first rolling surface is more advantageous to the player than the game ball that has flowed down below the second rolling surface. The variable control means is such that it is easy to enter the ball entry means to which the above-mentioned privilege can be given, and the variable control means is the regulation means when a specific operation is executed on the operation means. Is variably controlled from the first state to the second state . Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine developed. It is a perspective view which shows the main component part of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of a stage part, (a) shows a front view, and (b) shows a perspective view. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the holding device, (a) shows the front schematic view, (b) shows the schematic view when the game ball is held in the holding device, (c) is the bottom open The schematic diagram of the holding device at the time of this is shown. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electric composition in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a main control device. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical composition of a voice lamp control device and a display control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of the 1st hold area. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol winning / failing table storage area, (a) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a low probability mode, and (b) shows the special symbol winning / failing table for a high probability mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the distribution table storage area, (a) shows the distribution table (first distribution information group) for the 1st result display part, and (b) is for the 2nd result display part. The distribution table (second distribution information group) is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the holding ball detection processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button correspondence processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information executed in the main MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure special electric address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure change executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special drawing determination executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a round executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a special electric power which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during closing of a special electric power | execution which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power termination processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary power control processing which is executed in the main MPU. Fuzu This is a diagram for explaining the Fuden address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demo display executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball passage detection determination process executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main command correspondence processing following FIG. 39. It is a flowchart which shows the process corresponding to the holding device movable command executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st frame button invalid command correspondence processing executed in the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the data table for a pattern which develops into a super reach. It is a flowchart which shows the other correspondence processing executed by the display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed in the display side MPU. It is a figure which shows the holding device operation notice displayed on the symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball and a holding ball, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows a game ball which is likely to be discharged from a 3rd valley part, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows a game ball and a holding ball. (C) is a schematic diagram showing a collision between a game ball and a holding ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball and a holding ball, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball after colliding with the holding ball, and (b) is the holding ball discharged from the 3rd valley part. It is a schematic diagram which shows, and (c) is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball discharged from the 2nd valley part. It is a figure which shows the notification that the holding device has been properly operated, which is displayed on the symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the notification of improper operation of the holding device displayed on the symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the holding device holding ball unannouncement displayed on the symbol display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the holding device in the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the front schematic diagram, (b) is the schematic when the game ball is held in the holding device. The figure is shown, (c) shows a schematic diagram of the holding device when the bottom is opened, (d) shows a schematic diagram of the holding device when the partition plate is opened, and (e) shows a schematic diagram of the holding device when the partition plate is opened. The schematic diagram when the holding ball of is dropped is shown. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the stage part of the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the modification of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a stage portion in the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of the game ball in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is the schematic diagram which shows the game ball rolling in the 3rd valley part, (b) is the 2nd mountain part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball which collides with the right side surface. It is a schematic diagram which shows the collision between a game ball and a holding ball in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the stage part of the modification of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity of a stage part in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the front view, and (b) shows the perspective view. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball guided to the upper game ball rolling surface, (b) is the upper game ball It is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball discharged from the rolling surface. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of the game ball in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball which is likely to be discharged from the lower 3rd valley part, (b) is a game ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the holding ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the collision of a game ball and a reservation ball, and (b) is a schematic diagram after collision with a reservation ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the holding ball discharged from the lower 3rd valley part, (b) is the lower side third valley part. 2 It is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball discharged from the valley part. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the passive distribution unit of 4th Embodiment of this invention. (A) to (f) are diagrams for explaining the distribution operation of the passive distribution member. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the modification of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of a stage part in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of the holding ball in 5th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is the schematic diagram which shows the holding ball after colliding with the right side surface of the 2nd mountain part, (b) is the 2nd It is a schematic diagram which shows the holding ball toward the mountain part side, (c) is the schematic diagram which shows the holding ball discharged from the left front guide passage of the 3rd valley part. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball and a holding ball in 5th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball and the holding ball guided to the inclined surface, (b) is a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the collision with a holding ball with a sphere. It is a schematic diagram which shows the rolling of a game ball and a holding ball in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) is a schematic diagram which shows a game ball and a holding ball after a collision, and (b) is a left front guidance It is a schematic diagram which shows the game ball discharged from the passage and the holding ball discharged from the right front guidance passage.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In each of the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equal to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First Embodiment)
An example in which the first embodiment of the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which the main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front of the eleven. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment in the game hall.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit arranged behind the inner frame 13. It has 15 doors. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (open / close) with respect to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (other with respect to the rotation center) in front view. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so that it can rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. There is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game machine main body 12 is locked so that the game machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the rotation tip side thereof, and the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of putting 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the game machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 having a substantially rectangular opening in a substantially central portion. Has been done. A window panel 22 having two colorless and transparent flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front door frame 14, and the front surface (game area) of the game board 43, which will be described later, is the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side of. The window panel 22 may be made of a synthetic resin and is colorless and transparent, instead of the flat glass.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 protruding in front of the front door frame 14 below the window portion 21. Are lined up and down. Then, as shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23, and the game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface of the opening is inclined downward toward the right side when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is charged (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to the game ball launching mechanism (launching means) 44 described later.

Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operating means) at a substantially central portion of the upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened), and is in front of the first frame button 26. A second frame button 27 (operating means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is used when the player operates the opening / closing of the holding device 210 (see FIG. 9) described later. The second frame button 27 is a game when the stage (background) to be displayed is changed or the notice effect (conversation effect or character effect) to be displayed is changed (added) in the symbol display device 80 described later. Manipulated by a person. The second frame button 27 is also operated by the player when the volume, the amount of light, or the like controlled by the voice lamp control device 92, which will be described later, is changed. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape in the top view, and the second frame button 27 has a center key, an up / down key extending in the vertical direction about the center key, and a center key in the top view. The left and right keys extending in the left-right direction around the center are arranged in close proximity to each other, and the shapes of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 can be changed as appropriate.

The stage is a production (background) mode in which the production displayed on the symbol display device 80 is unified. In this pachinko machine 10, the “underwater stage”, “beach stage”, and “city stage” are used. There are three stages. Then, various productions such as reach production, which will be described later, are set so as to be productions according to the theme corresponding to each stage. Further, the stage can be changed by the player operating the first frame button 26 during a period during which the fluctuation display is not performed and a predetermined period during which the fluctuation display is performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) described later. This is performed, and each time the first frame button 26 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side of the front view from the second frame button 27. As a result, when the ball lending button 28 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall or the like, the ball lending button 28 is operated in response to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are not required for pachinko machines, so-called cash machines, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. As a result, it is possible to standardize a pachinko machine (CR machine) using a card unit and a cash machine.

Inside the lower bulging portion 24, a lower plate 30 is provided which opens upward like the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 provided on the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through the discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. ..

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 operated by the player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 43, which will be described later, is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 30 when viewed from the front. .. Inside the operation handle 31, a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is being touched by the player, and a game ball even in a situation where the player is rotating the operation handle 31. It has a built-in push-button type stop switch 31b for stopping firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electrical resistance. Then, when the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, so that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 31 The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the above, and the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43 described later with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball pulling lever 32 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 30 when discharging the ball stored in the lower plate 30 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower plate 30. The ball pulling lever 32 is usually arranged in the right direction, and by sliding it to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. It is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 32 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

Further, the front door frame 14 is provided with an illumination unit 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED around the window unit 21, and a pair of speaker units 34 are provided at both left and right ends above the window unit 21. It is equipped. In the pachinko machine 10, each illumination unit 33 lights up or blinks at the time of hitting or reaching, to notify that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. By notifying that the player is hitting or reaching, the effect of the effect during the game is enhanced. In addition, the illumination unit 33 also functions as an error lamp that blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 35 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated in the area around the illumination portion 33, is attached.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the central portion of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. The resin base 41 is detachably attached to the game board 43 shown in FIG. 5, and is provided with a game ball launching mechanism 44 for firing the game ball into the front region of the game board 43. The game ball launch mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and the launch rail 45 extending toward the induction rail described later and the game ball stored in the upper plate 25 are placed on the launch rail 45. The ball feeding device 46 is provided with a ball feeding device 46, and a firing solenoid 47, which is an electric actuator that launches a game ball supplied on the launch rail 45 toward the induction rail. Then, by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled, and the game ball is launched.

Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, an inner rail 51, an outer rail 52, and a general winning opening 53 on the front surface of a base plate 50 made of a resin material cut into a substantially rectangular shape in the front view. 1st start port (1st start ball entry section, 1st ball entry section) 54, 2nd start port (2nd start ball entry section) 55, variable winning device 56, normal symbol start gate 57, variable display device unit 58 Etc. are assembled and configured. The general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, the normal symbol starting gate 57, and the variable display device unit 58 are formed in the through holes formed in the base plate 50 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed from the front side of the game board 43 with wood screws or the like. The peripheral portion of such a game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the central portion of the front surface can be visually recognized via the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14. There is.

On the back side of the game board 43, detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, corresponding to the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, the variable winning device 56, and the ordinary symbol starting gate 57, respectively. 56c and 57a (see FIG. 11) are provided. Then, when a ball enters the general winning opening 53, the first and second starting ports 54, 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, the ball entering is detected by the corresponding detection sensor, and the detection result is obtained. It is output to the main control device 91 described later. As the detection sensor, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as it can individually detect the entry of a game ball.

Further, when the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the variable winning device 56 is detected, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. Will be done.
In the present embodiment, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 53, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 56, 15 game balls are paid out. When the payout is executed and the balls enter the first and second starting ports 54 and 55, the payout of three game balls is executed. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls for entering the first starting port 54 may be larger than the number of prize balls for entering the second starting port 55. .. Further, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 56 is not limited to a configuration larger than the number of other prize balls. For example, the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning device 56 is the general winning opening 53. The number of prize balls may be less than the number of prize balls for entering the ball.

The inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 are formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 form a guide rail and a game ball launching mechanism. The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, a resin connecting member 59 connecting between the lower right tip of the inner rail 51 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 52 is arranged in front view. There is. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 51, the outer rail 52, and the connecting member 59, and is an area in which the game is played according to the behavior of the game ball (launched game ball). The area where is flowing down).

Further, a return ball prevention member 60 is attached to the tip side (upper left portion of FIG. 5) of the inner rail 51, and the game ball once launched to the upper part (game area) of the game board 43 is guided by the guide rail (inner rail 51). It is possible to suppress the return to the inside (the area between the outer rail 52 and the outer rail 52). A return rubber 61 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a force equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 61. , The momentum is being dampened and bounced back toward the center.

A first starting port 54 through which a game ball can enter is arranged in the lower center of the game board 43 in front view, and a game ball is located on the lower right side of the game board 43 in front view (right side of the first starting port 54). A second starting port 55 is provided so that the ball can enter. More specifically, the first starting port 54 is formed directly below the lower discharge port 198 formed in the stage portion 190, which will be described later, in front view (see FIG. 8). Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 54, the entry of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 54a (see FIG. 11). Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 55, the corresponding detection sensor 55a (see FIG. 11) detects the entry of the game ball. Then, the detection result is output to the main control device 91, which will be described later, and the main control device 91 determines whether or not a special symbol is hit (determines whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode), and a lottery is performed. The display according to the result is shown on the symbol display device 80 described later.

Further, an electric accessory 63 is provided at the second starting port 55. The electric accessory 63 is configured to be openable and closable, and when the electric accessory 63 is in the closed state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 55 or is difficult to enter, and the electric accessory 63 is electrically operated. When the accessory 63 is in the open state, the game ball is in a state in which it is easy to enter the second starting port 55.

The normal symbol start gate (through gate) 57 is provided on the right side of the center of the front view of the game board 43. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the passage (entry ball) of the game ball is detected by the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 11), and the detection result is output to the main control device 91 described later. Will be done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the main control device 91, which will be described later, determines whether or not the normal symbol hits (determines whether or not the electric accessory 63 is opened). Then, when the determination result is a hit (winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory drive unit 63a (see FIG. 11) is driven to open the electric accessory 63. Therefore, the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 55.

As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are installed, and in the high probability mode, the hit probability of a normal symbol is increased and the electric accessory 63 is likely to be in an open state. It has become. Therefore, in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is more advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63, so that the game ball has a symbol. The game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side of the display device 80 when viewed from the front (so-called right-handed strike).

The variable winning device 56 is arranged on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 43, and includes a large winning opening 56a leading to the back side of the game board 43, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b covering the large winning opening 56a, and a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b. It is configured to have a variable winning drive unit 56d (see FIG. 11) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 56b forward on the lower side of the opening / closing plate 56b. The large winning opening 56a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Then, when it is determined that the main control device 91, which will be described later, has won the transition to the open / close execution mode (wins the winning lottery), the variable winning drive unit 56d is driven and the open / close plate 56b is tilted downward on the front surface. Then, the game ball temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 56a, and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normally closed state. For example, the normally closed large winning opening 56a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls are inserted). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 56 is determined by the determined hit type. For example, in the case of the 16R probability variation hit result described later, the opening / closing operation is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a privileged gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is given to the player as a game value (game value). The payout will be made. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 and enters the grand prize opening 56a (so-called right-handed strike). ). The opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a lottery for winning the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 91, which will be described later, is won, and the opening / closing execution mode will be described later. To do.

A plurality of general winning openings 53 are provided below the front view of the game board 43. More specifically about the general winning opening 53, one of the general winning openings 53 is provided directly below the forward guidance passage 196b (see FIG. 8) formed in the second valley portion 196, which will be described later, in front view. .. In the following, when the general winning opening 53 provided directly below the forward guide passage 196b formed in the second valley portion 196 is clearly distinguished from the other general winning openings 53, this general is used. The winning opening 53 is referred to as a special general winning opening (second ball entry section) 53b. In addition, an out port 66 is provided at the lowermost part of the front view of the game board 43, so that game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area through the out openings 66. ..

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharging from the game area after passing through the opening. The mode which is not performed is also included. In this specification, the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 53, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the variable winning device 56 (large winning opening 56a) is also referred to as winning.

A sticking space 70 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space 70 is a front door frame. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of 14.

Further, a main display unit 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided in the lower left corner portion (outside of the outer rail 52) of the game board 43 in front view. The main display unit 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window unit 21 of the front door frame 14.

The main display unit 71 is based on the winning of the first result display unit 71a and the second starting port 55 showing the result of the first lottery game performed by the main control device 91 based on the winning of the first starting port 54. The second result display unit 71b showing the result of the second lottery game performed by the main control device 91, when the variable winning device 56 is in the open / close execution mode (or is in the open / close execution mode) by winning the winning lottery. In the case), the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode has a round display unit 71c indicating the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened.

Specifically, the first result display unit 71a performs a variable display regarding the first lottery game, and the variable display (blinks) until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game elapses. After the display), as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the first lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 71a and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Further, in the second result display unit 71b, the variable display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variable display (blinking display) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. After that, as the stop result of the fluctuation display, the stop display is performed in the lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. Then, when the lottery result of the second lottery game is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 71b and the variable display is stopped. Later, it shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, based on the first and second lottery games (winning to any of the first and second starting ports 54 and 55), the variable display is displayed on the corresponding first and second result display units 71a and 71b. The period from the start to the display of the predetermined stop result and the stop of the variation display corresponds to one game (variation display). However, one game round is not limited to the above contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variation display is performed in, the variation display is started in the single result display unit, and the period until the variation display is stopped while the predetermined stop result is displayed is regarded as one game. To do.

Further, the main display unit 71 has other display units 71d in addition to the first and second result display units 71a and 71b and the round display unit 71c. In the other display unit 71d, for example, a variable display is performed triggered by a prize in the normal symbol start gate 57, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the prize in the normal symbol start gate 57 is performed. The results are shown. Then, if the result of the internal lottery triggered by winning the normal symbol start gate 57 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric accessory, the other display unit 71d displays a predetermined stop result. After the lighting is displayed, the state shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 63 is in the open state, and the game ball is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 55.

Further, if the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57 while the other display unit 71d is performing the variable display triggered by winning the normal symbol start gate 57, the maximum number of passages is 4 in this embodiment. It is held up to the number of times, and the number of holds is also displayed. Further, if a game ball wins in the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 while the variable display is being performed in the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b, the number of winnings is the number of winnings in the present embodiment. The first starting port 54 is held up to 4 times, and the second starting port 55 is held up to 4 times, and the number of times of holding is also displayed.

The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the number of LEDs is small depending on the combination of the emission colors. It is possible to suggest various game states of. Further, the main display unit 71 may be configured by using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The variable display device unit 58 is arranged in the center of the game board 43. The variable display device unit 58 changes and displays the first special symbol while synchronizing with the change display on the first result display unit 71a to display the lottery result of the first lottery game and changes on the second result display unit 71b. A symbol display device 80 having a display screen 80a for displaying the lottery result of the second lottery game by varyingly displaying the second special symbol while synchronizing with the display, and a center frame 81 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 80. have. The center frame 81 is installed with its upper portion extending in front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. ..

The design display device 80 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display having a substantially rectangular shape. Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 and the second starting opening 55 as the trigger. 2 The upper upper display area Dm for displaying the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the lottery game, and the lower lower display area Dn for displaying the reserved symbols (holding of the first lottery game and the second lottery game). have.

In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by the display control device 93 described later. Further, the symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT.

In the pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is arranged so that the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction so as to be variablely displayed. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started when a prize is won in the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55. That is, when the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b performs the variable display, the symbol display device 80 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, in the game round of shifting to the open / close execution mode, the symbol display device 80 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine types of main symbols with the numbers "1" to "9" shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (i), respectively. And, it is composed of a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture shown in FIG. 7 (j). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of nine types of character symbols such as an octopus to which numbers "1" to "9" are added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper row, the middle row, and the lower row are set in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is the main. The symbols and sub-symbols are arranged in a cyclic manner in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and between each main symbol. Sub-designs are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are each composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the fluctuation direction of the symbols), and then the main symbol of "9" is arranged. The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged between the main symbol of "1" and the main symbol of "1", and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, in the upper display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

Then, when the effect for the game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm triggered by the winning of the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, the symbols in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. The variable display is started so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the variable display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for game use. The production of is finished.

In addition, when the production for the game round ends, if the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines, and the open / close execution mode is formed. The hit video is displayed as a transition to (occurrence of hit result).

As described above, the symbol display device 80 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) varies with the winning of any of the first and second start ports 54 and 55. The period from the start of the display to the display of the predetermined stop result and the stop of the variable display corresponds to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 7, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

The lower display area Dn is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. The lower display area Dn has a first reserved symbol display area Ds on the left side of the front view and a second reserved symbol display area Dt on the right side of the front view, and has a first reserved symbol display area Ds and a second reserved symbol. It has an execution pending symbol display area Du between it and the display area Ds. The first reserved symbol display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54, and in this pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the first starting port 54 is held up to four times. Since it is configured as such, it is equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the four small areas. The second hold symbol display area Dt is an area for displaying the number of holds triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 55, and in this pachinko machine 10, winning a prize in the second starting port 55 is held up to four times. Since it is configured as such, it is equally divided into the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of four small areas. The execution pending symbol display area Du is an area for displaying the reserved symbols corresponding to the game times variablely displayed on the symbol display device 80.

Then, in the upper display area Dm, when the game ball wins the first starting port 54 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the first lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower In the first reserved symbol display area Ds of the side display area Dn, the display area (center side display area) having the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 in which the reserved symbols are not displayed is the first. 1 The reserved symbol of the lottery game is displayed. Similarly, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 55 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing, the start of the second lottery game triggered by the winning is suspended, and the lower display area Dn In the second reserved symbol display area Dt, the second lottery game is held in the display area (display area on the center side) of the smallest number among the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 where the reserved symbol is not displayed. The design is displayed.

The center frame 81 has a stage portion 190 in the lower part of the front view. Here, the configuration of the stage unit 190 of the present embodiment will be described. 8A and 8B are enlarged views of the vicinity of the stage portion 190, where FIG. 8A shows a front view and FIG. 8B shows a perspective view. In FIG. 8B, the front wall portion 199, the first starting opening 54, the special general winning opening 53b, and the nail shown in FIG. 8A are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 8, the stage portion 190 has a game ball rolling surface 191 above which the game ball can roll in the front-view left-right direction, and is behind the front view of the game ball rolling surface 191. (Rear end) has a rear wall portion 192 that is connected to the game ball rolling surface 191 and extends substantially vertically above the game ball rolling surface 191. The rear wall portion 192 exhibits a function of suppressing the game ball rolling on the game ball rolling surface 191 from jumping into the symbol display device 80 side.

The game ball rolling surface 191 has a smooth streamline (curved) shape, and the first mountain portion 193 is formed on the left side of the center of the front view and the second mountain portion 194 is formed on the right side of the center of the front view. The left side of the first mountain part 193 is the first valley part 195, the area between the first mountain part 193 and the second mountain part 194 is the second valley part 196, and the right side of the second mountain part 194 is the third valley part. It is said to be 197. That is, on the game ball rolling surface 191, the first valley portion 195, the first mountain portion 193, the second valley portion 196, the second mountain portion 194, and the third valley portion 197 are formed in this order from the left side of the front view. There is. Further, the portion on the left side of the front view from the first valley portion 195 and the portion on the right side of the front view from the third valley portion 197 are each inclined (descended) toward the central portion. Therefore, when the game ball is guided to the portion on the left side of the front view from the first valley portion 195 or the portion on the right side of the front view from the third valley portion 197, the game ball rolls toward the central portion. ..

The first mountain portion 193 has a substantially flat surface at the top thereof, and a rear guide passage (location for the first ball entry portion) 193a for guiding the game ball rearward is formed on the flat surface. ing. Specifically, the rear guidance passage 193a has a shape that extends in the front-rear direction in the front view and is inclined toward the rear, so as to guide the game ball to the upper discharge port 192a formed in the rear wall portion 192. Is formed in. Further, in the stage portion 190, a lower discharge port 198 is formed below the game ball rolling surface 191 (in the present embodiment, below the first mountain portion 193), and an upper discharge port 192a is formed inside. A continuous passage (not shown) connecting the lower discharge port 198 is formed. Therefore, the game ball guided to the rear guide passage 193a in the game ball rolling surface 191 is discharged from the lower discharge port 198 via the continuous passage after passing through the upper discharge port 192a. As described above, the first starting port 54 is formed directly below the lower discharge port 198 in the front view. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the lower discharge port 198 can easily win a prize in the first starting port 54 by falling as it is. That is, the game ball rolling on the game ball rolling surface 191 is guided to the rear guidance passage 193a and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191 so that the first starting port 54 can be easily won a prize.

A front guidance passage 195a for guiding the game ball forward is formed in the first valley portion 195, and a front guidance passage 196a and a front guidance passage (second entry) for guiding the game ball forward are formed in the second valley portion 196. A ball portion) 196b is formed, and a forward guiding passage (holding ball discharging portion) 197a for guiding the game ball forward is formed in the third valley portion 197. Specifically, each of the front guide passages 195a, 196a, 196b, and 197a has a shape that extends in the front-rear direction in the front view and is inclined toward the front. In the present embodiment, the second valley portion 196 is formed with two forward guide passages 196a and 196b in the front left-right direction (arrangement direction of the first mountain portion 193 and the second mountain portion 194). The forward guidance passage 196a is located on the first mountain portion 193 side, and the front guidance passage 196b is located on the second mountain portion 194 side. In the following, when the forward guidance passages 196a and 196b formed in the second valley portion 196 are clearly distinguished, the front guidance passage 196a formed on the first mountain portion 193 side is referred to as a left front guidance passage 196a. The front guidance passage 196b formed on the second mountain portion 194 side is referred to as a right front guidance passage 196b.

Further, the stage portion 190 is connected to the game ball rolling surface 191 in front of the front view (front end) of the game ball rolling surface 191 and extends substantially vertically above the game ball rolling surface 191. It has a front wall portion 199. Specifically, the front wall portion 199 prepares for a region different from the region constituting the first valley portion 195, the second valley portion 196, and the third valley portion 197 of the front ends of the game ball rolling surface 191. Has been done. Therefore, if the game ball is not guided to the rear guidance passage 193a (upper discharge port 192a) after the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191, the game ball is set to the first valley portion 195, It is discharged to the outside of the stage portion 190 (game ball rolling surface 191) from either the second valley portion 196 or the third valley portion 197. Since the first valley portion 195, the second valley portion 196, and the third valley portion 197 are formed diagonally above the first start port 54 in the front view, the game ball is discharged from the lower discharge port 198. It is more difficult to win a prize in the first starting port 54 as compared with the case where it is done.

However, as described above, the special general winning opening 53b is formed directly below the right front guidance passage 196b formed in the second valley portion 196 in the front view. Therefore, the game ball discharged from the right front guidance passage 196b of the second valley portion 196 is the left front guidance formed in the front guidance passage 195a formed in the first valley portion 195 and the left front guidance passage 196 formed in the second valley portion 196. It is easier to win the special general winning opening 53b than the game ball discharged from the front guidance passage 197a formed in the passage 196a or the third valley portion 197. Then, when a game ball wins in the special general prize opening 53b, the player cannot receive the lottery game to shift to the open / close execution mode, but pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (10 in this embodiment). Can be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the center frame 81 holds a game ball guided to the first guidance passage 203, which will be described later, in the upper right side of the front view (the upper right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80). The holding device 210 is provided so that the player can eject the held game ball by operating the first frame button 26. Here, the configuration of the holding device 210 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (a) is a schematic view of the holding device 210, FIG. 9 (b) is a schematic view showing a state when the game ball is held by the holding device 210, and FIG. 9 (c) is a first frame button by the player. It is a schematic diagram of the holding device 210 when the bottom 210b is opened by operating 26.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the holding device 210 of the present embodiment has a bottomed tubular shape in which one end (upper part) is an opening 210a and the other end (lower part) is closed by a bottom part 210b. It is said that. Further, the holding device 210 includes a holding device driving unit 210c (see FIG. 11) for driving the bottom 210b, a holding ball detection sensor 210d (see FIG. 11) for detecting a game ball held by the holding device 210, and Equipped with rails, etc.

The holding device 210 is controlled to open and close the bottom 210b by driving the holding device driving unit 210c by the main control device 91 (player's first frame button operation) described later. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the bottom 210b is provided in a portion corresponding to a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 43, and is accommodated in the through hole when it is opened. It has become. Further, the holding ball detection sensor 210d is connected to the main control device 91 described later, detects whether or not the game ball is held by the holding device 210, and outputs the detection result to the main control device 91. However, in the present embodiment, the holding ball detection sensor 210d is arranged so as to detect whether or not the game ball is held directly above the bottom 210b. In other words, the holding ball detection sensor 210d is arranged so as to be able to detect whether or not at least one game ball is held in the holding device 210.

Further, in the holding device 210 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9B, the length from the bottom surface (the surface of the bottom 210b on the opening 210a side) to the opening 210a is X, and the diameter of the game ball is defined as X. If it is L, it is configured to satisfy (3L + 1 / 2L) <X <4L. That is, the holding device 210 of the present embodiment is configured to hold up to four game balls. Since X <4L, when four game balls are held in the holding device 210, the top game ball (fourth game ball from the bottom 210b side) is the opening of the holding device 210. A part of it protrudes from 210a. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, when four game balls are held in the holding device 210, a new game ball is guided to the opening 210a of the holding device 210 by the first guidance passage 203 described later. Even if the new game ball is repelled by colliding with the uppermost game ball held in the holding device 210, it is not held in the holding device 210. Further, in the present embodiment, since (3L + 1 / 2L) <X, when four game balls are held in the holding device 210, more than half of the uppermost game balls are housed in the holding device 210. Will be done. Therefore, even if a new game ball guided by the first guidance passage 203, which will be described later, collides with the uppermost game ball held in the holding device 210, the uppermost game ball is held by the new game ball. It is possible to prevent the device 210 from being ejected. Hereinafter, the game ball held by the holding device 210 and the game ball discharged from the holding device 210 are also referred to as a holding ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the bottom 210b is in the closed state (the bottom 210b is not housed in the through hole), the game ball is held and the bottom 210b is in the open state (bottom 210b). Is housed in the through hole), the reserved ball is discharged. As will be described later, the bottom 210b is closed after being opened by the player operating the first frame button 26, but in the present embodiment, the player presses the first frame button 26. It is controlled so that one game ball is ejected for each operation (pressing). In the following, the fact that the bottom 210b is in the closed state means that the holding device 210 is in the closed state, and the fact that the bottom 210b is in the open state also means that the holding device 210 is in the open state.

The above is the configuration of the holding device 210 in this embodiment. Then, as shown in FIG. 5, the center frame 81 is provided with a holding ball guiding passage 220 that guides the holding ball discharged from the holding device 210 to the game ball rolling surface 191 below the holding device 210. Has been done. Specifically, the reserved ball guiding passage 220 is arranged so as to guide the reserved ball on the right side of the third valley portion 197 on the game ball rolling surface 191 in the front view. Therefore, the holding ball discharged from the holding device 210 is guided to the right side of the third valley portion 197 of the game ball rolling surface 191 and then rolls toward the second mountain portion 194. Further, in the holding ball guiding passage 220, an adjusting member 221 (adjusting means) for adjusting the speed (mechanical energy) when the holding ball discharged from the holding device 210 is introduced into the game ball rolling surface 191. ) Is provided.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball held by the holding device 210 is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 of the second mountain portion 194, the reserved ball gets over the second mountain portion 194. The height (passing prevention means) is set so as not to reach the second valley 196. In other words, when the holding ball held by the holding device 210 is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191, the holding device 210 gets over the second mountain portion 194 and reaches the second valley portion 196. The arrangement position (height) is set so as not to prevent it. That is, the installation position, material, shape, etc. of the adjusting member 221 are set so that the holding ball discharged from the holding device 210 does not get over the second mountain portion 194 and reach the second valley portion 196. That is, the second mountain portion 194, the holding device 210, and the adjusting member 221 are each shaped so that the holding ball does not pass over the second mountain portion 194 and reach the second valley portion 196. In other words, the shapes of the second mountain portion 194, the holding device 210, and the adjusting member 221 can be appropriately changed as long as the holding ball does not reach the second valley portion 196 over the second mountain portion 194. is there.

Further, in the center frame 81, a first opening 200 is formed on the upper left side of the front view, and a second opening 201 is formed on the upper left side of the front view below the first opening 200, so that the front view can be seen. A third opening 202 is formed in the central portion on the left side. The center frame 81 is provided with a first guide passage 203 that connects the first opening 200 and the opening 210a of the holding device 210, and the opening 210a and the second opening 201 of the holding device 210. A second guide passage 204 is provided to connect the two guide passages.

In the present embodiment, the first guide passage 203 and the second guide passage 204 are arranged with the symbol display device 80 so that the visibility of the symbol display device 80 is not deteriorated by the first guide passage 203 and the second guide passage 204. It is arranged above the front view of. That is, the first guide passage 203 and the second guide passage 204 are arranged so as not to overlap with the symbol display device 80.

The first guide passage 203 has a shape that is inclined from the first opening 200 toward the opening 210a side of the holding device 210, and the game ball that has passed through the first opening 200 is the opening 210a of the holding device 210. It is arranged so as to be guided by. Further, the second guide passage 204 has a shape that is inclined from the opening 210a side of the holding device 210 toward the second opening 201 side, and is a game ball that does not pass through the opening 210a of the holding device 210. A game ball that is not held by the holding device 210) is arranged so as to be guided to the second opening 201. That is, when four reserved balls are newly held in the holding device 210 and the game balls are newly guided from the first guide passage 203 toward the opening 210a of the holding device 210, the game balls are held. The second guide passage 204 is arranged so as to eject the game ball from the second opening 201 because it is not held by the device 210.

In the present embodiment, no nails, windmills, or the like are arranged in the vicinity of the first opening 200, and the player launches a game ball so as to pass through the first opening 200 to hold the device. The game ball can be easily held by 210.

Further, the center frame 81 is provided with a third guide passage (so-called warp passage) 205 that communicates with the third opening 202 and guides the game ball that has passed through the third opening 202 to the game ball rolling surface 191. Has been done. Specifically, the third guide passage 205 is arranged so as to guide the game ball on the left side of the first valley portion 195 on the game ball rolling surface 191 in the front view. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the third guide passage 205 rolls from the first valley portion 195 side toward the first mountain portion 193, and then rolls in the left-right direction in the front view (see FIG. 49).

Further, the third guide passage 205 is provided with a game ball passage detection sensor 206 that detects the passage of the game ball. That is, the game ball passing through the third guide passage 205 is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 after being detected by the game ball passage detection sensor 206. Then, the detection result of the game ball passage detection sensor 206 is output to the voice lamp control device 92 described later. As such a detection sensor, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the sensor to be used is arbitrary as long as the passage of the game ball can be detected individually.

In the present embodiment, the second opening 201 is formed above the front view of the third opening 202, and the game ball discharged from the second opening 201 (although it has passed through the first opening 200). The game ball that is not held by the holding device 210) flows down the game area in the same manner as the game ball that flows down on the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 without passing through the first opening 200. Therefore, even if the player continues to shoot the game balls so as to pass through the first opening 200 after the four game balls are held in the holding device 210, the player still fires the game balls through the first opening 200. It can be expected that the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 as in the case where the game ball is launched so as not to pass through.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the game machine main body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 10.
FIG. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), a main control device 91 that controls the main control of the game and a voice lamp control device that controls the voice, the lamp display, and the like. 92 and a display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control substrate is housed in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box has a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base, and these box bases and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box joint as a (bonding means). Since the substrate boxes are inseparably connected by these box joints, the substrate box needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box is opened. In addition, for example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box joint as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box can be formed by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box joint. It is designed so that it cannot be opened with the cover. The joining process by the box joining part prevents illegal opening after the joining, and even if illegal opening is performed, such a situation can be detected early and easily, and once. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. Then, when the board box is opened when a defect occurs in the housed control board or when the control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box connecting portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion or the like. , Cut the connecting part between the box joint and the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box and the box cover are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw may be inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion. If the history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it is possible to easily find out whether or not the board box has been opened illegally by looking at the board box.

Further, a plurality of bonding pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces are provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces formed on the mounting bases of the respective control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are provided by the coupling pieces and the coupling pieces. The combination process is performed with and.

In addition, as a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 91, the display control device 93, and the voice lamp control device 92. There is. The back pack unit 15 includes a transparent back pack 94, and a payout mechanism portion 95 and a control device collecting unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

The payout mechanism unit 95 includes a tank 97 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 connected below the tank 97 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail. A payout device 99 is provided at the most downstream portion of the 98 and pays out balls according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 11). Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 99 is discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. A vibrator (not shown) for adding vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98. Further, the payout mechanism unit 95 is equipped with, for example, a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of 24 volts AC.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control device collective unit 96 generates and outputs a payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99 and predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and a player. It is provided with a power supply and a launch control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the operation handle 31 by the user. The payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 10, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and emission control device 101 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. There is. The state return switch 102 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 11). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The payout control device 100, the power supply and the launch control device 101 are configured by accommodating a control board or the like in a board box, similarly to each of the above control devices, and are provided with the same fraud deterrent means as described above. .. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at an upper corner portion on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal board 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the tank 97 or the like runs out of game balls, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for signal output each time the door frame 14 is rented, output terminal for signal output when the game machine main body 12 is opened, output terminal for signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened, and state transition such as opening / closing execution mode At that time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal or the like for outputting a signal is provided. Then, a signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine. In addition, each control device (each control board) has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and a random number generation used in various lottery, which will be described later. A device, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 11 to 13 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 11 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 12 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91, and FIG. 13 mainly shows the configuration of the main control device 91. The configuration of the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 is shown. In FIG. 13, the supply lines of the operating power from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 are indicated by double-line arrows, and the other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid line arrows. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. In the following, the MPU 112, ROM 113, and RAM 114 of the main control device 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

The main ROM 113 is configured to use a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 12, the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a and the distribution table are stored. Storage area 113b, Reach table storage area 113c, Variable display time table storage area 113d, Stop result table storage area 113e, Normal symbol hit / miss table storage area 113f, Special figure special electric address table storage area 113g, Normal figure general electric address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

The main RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. Then, the main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 is, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electric counter area 114d, a special symbol special electric timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, time saving flag storage area 114g, time saving number counter area 114h, Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i, Fuzu Fuden timer counter area 114j, various hit result flag storage area 114k, holding device movable period timer counter area 114m, and various others It has a counter area 114n and various other flag storage areas 114p. The holding device movable period timer counter area 114m is an area in which the holding device movable period timer counter in which one movable period of the bottom 210b of the holding device 210 is set is stored.

In addition to the above elements, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a one-chip configuration in which the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114 are built-in, and the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. It may be a configured configuration. This also applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown), respectively. An input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the configuration may be such that the input port and the output port can be switched as needed. This also applies to the MPU of each control device described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and the output side of the main MPU 112, and various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, a holding ball detection sensor 210d, and various drives are connected. Units 56d and 63a, the main display unit 71, and the holding device drive unit 210c are connected. First, a connection configuration with various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, a holding ball detection sensor 210d, various driving units 56d, 63a, a main display unit 71, and a holding device driving unit 210c will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

On the input side of the main MPU 112, a winning detection provided for a general winning opening 53, a first starting opening 54, a second starting opening 55, a variable winning device 56, and a normal symbol starting gate 57 in the game area. The sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a (hereinafter, collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a may be connected to each other via one electrical wiring, and a relay board is interposed in the middle of each signal path. It may be configured as such. This also applies to the configuration related to the connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a through the winning IC 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and determines the winning of each winning unit based on the reception result. (Judgment of entry) is performed. In addition, the main MPU 112 executes a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winning the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and also wins a prize at the normal symbol starting gate 57. Based on this, the electric accessory opening lottery (support lottery) is executed.

The winning IC 116 is a route abnormality confirmation means or a route abnormality confirmation circuit, and the winning IC 116 transmits a normal signal between the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a and the main MPU 112. Check if transmission is taking place.

Further, on the input side of the main MPU 112, in addition to the above-mentioned winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and a first frame button The first frame button detection sensor 26a for detecting the operation of the 26 and the holding ball detection sensor 210d are electrically connected via electrical wiring. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines the presence or absence of an abnormality to be detected. judge. Further, the signal from the first frame button detection sensor 26a is received, and the driving of the holding device 210 (holding device driving unit 210c) is controlled according to the operation of the player with respect to the first frame button 26. Further, it receives a signal from the holding ball detection sensor 210d and determines whether or not the holding ball is held by the holding device 210.

On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable winning drive unit 56d for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 56b of the variable winning device 56 and an electric accessory driving unit 63a for opening / closing the electric accessory 63 are electrically connected via electrical wiring. It is connected. Further, on the output side of the main MPU 112, a holding device driving unit 210c that opens and closes the holding device 210 (bottom 210b) is electrically connected via electrical wiring. That is, the opening and closing of the holding device drive unit 210c is controlled by the main MPU 112 that executes a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55. .. In other words, the main MPU 112 opens and closes the holding device drive unit 210c together with a function of executing a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55. It has a function to control (holding device open / close control means). Further, the main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electrical wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the main MPU 112 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d and the electric accessory drive unit 63a through the driver circuit, and displays the main display unit 71. Take control.

For example, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d is executed on the main MPU 112 so that the large winning opening 56a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric accessory 63 is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 63a is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the electric accessory 63 is opened and closed. Then, when the first frame button 26 is operated by the player, the holding device driving unit 210c in the main MPU 112 opens and closes according to the operation of the first frame button 26 by the player. Drive control is executed. Further, at each game round, the display control of the main display units 71 (first and second result display units 71a, 71b) is executed on the main MPU 112. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 63 is shown, the display control of the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is executed on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 sets information in the main RAM 114 according to the progress of the game. Although omitted in FIG. 11, an external output terminal board 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 signals according to the information set in the main RAM 114. The output setting is made to the external output terminal board 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer in the game hall.

Next, the configuration in the connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before explaining the configuration in these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control device 100 will be described.

The payout control device 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 99, the payout control board 121 is equipped with an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 has a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. .. In the following, the MPU 122, ROM 123 and RAM 124 provided in the payout control device 100 will be referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123 and the payout side RAM 124.

The payout side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side MPU 122.

The payout side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout side ROM 123. Then, the payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123 is executed. In addition to the above elements, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 switches between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 is prevented from flowing down to the downstream side and a state in which the game ball is sent out to the downstream side. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stop member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting a game ball sent out to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via electrical wiring. Has been done. The payout side MPU 122 supplies a drive signal to the payout motor 99a via a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121 to execute the payout of the game ball, and pays out based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Grasp the number of game balls that have been released.

Further, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 provided on the back pack unit 15 via electrical wiring, and the ball rental connection terminal plate 131 is electrically connected via electrical wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. As a result, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by appropriately manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10. The payout side MPU 122 executes ball lending control by transmitting and receiving an electric signal to and from the card unit.

Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, a fullness detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball tray is electrically connected to the payout side MPU 122. In addition, a ballless detection sensor (not shown) or the like that detects whether the tank 97 is in a ballless state is electrically connected.

Then, the payout side MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on the communication with the main side MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

In detail about the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms that the winning portion has won the prize ball corresponding to the generation of the prize ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, the signal path is directed toward the payout side MPU 122. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted, and a first signal path SL1 is provided for transmitting the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

There are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 53 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 56 is specified, 15 are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning of the first and second starting ports 54 and 55 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output. To.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication in communicating the prize ball command. That is, the information of the plurality of bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

Further, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout status commands include a prize ball completion command indicating that the prize ball has been completed and the number of completed prize balls, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred in paying out the game ball, and the predetermined value. It contains an abnormal termination command that indicates that the error has been cleared. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of its own command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as a plurality of bits of information. The predetermined abnormality relating to the payout of the game ball includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a ball-less state of the tank 97.

In communicating the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, the configuration is such that the information of the plurality of bits included in the payout status command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout side MPU 122 to the main side MPU 112 in order for the main side MPU 112 to grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

The payout permission signal consists of 1-bit information. The LOW level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and the HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. To. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and the LOW level signal is output when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. It may be configured to be.

The third signal path SL3 is provided by a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. Although it is configured, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured by a plurality of connector units by passing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

In this way, the command communication between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is serial communication instead of parallel communication, so that the electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 can be used. On the other hand, even if a fraudulent act using a so-called hanging board for connecting an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden by electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally pay out a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted as the target of the above action. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned illegal boards are used. It is easy to hide due to electrical wiring. On the other hand, since the command communication is performed by serial communication, it becomes difficult for the illegal board to be hidden in the electrical wiring, and it becomes easy to find the board if it is temporarily installed.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

The power supply and launch control device 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100. A power supply circuit 142 having the power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power supply unit 143 for power-on and a power supply unit 144 for power failure.

The power supply unit 143 for power-on is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, or the like is based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. The required operating voltage is generated for each, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As an outline, the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on takes in the AC 24 volt power supply supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15, and has a + 12 V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, and the like. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, the main control device 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 at an intermediate position of the power supply path between the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on and the main MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power supply. Then, when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power failure signal) to the main MPU 112 is assumed to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power cutoff has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power failure has occurred. ..
The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

The power supply unit 144 for power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. It will be charged. Further, in a power cut state (when the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off) such as when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power supply unit 144 for power supply is discharged. As a result, storage retention power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and retained without being erased while the storage and holding power is being supplied from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure.

The capacity of the power supply unit 144 for power failure is secured to be relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). ..
Further, the configuration of the power supply unit 144 for power failure is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store electricity in the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

Further, although the description by illustration is omitted, the power supply and the emission control board 141 are provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 144 for power failure. In the power supply and emission control board 141, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volt, it is controlled for a sufficient time for executing the power failure processing by discharging from the power supply unit for power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive power supply for the system, at a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

Here, a configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 will be described.

The electric power from the power supply unit 143 at the time of power-on is supplied to the VCS terminal of the main MPU 112 and the VCS terminal of the payout side MPU 122. In a situation where power is supplied from a commercial power source by the power supplied to the VCS terminal, various control processes are executed by the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held by the RAMs 114 and 124. Will be.

On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112, but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout side MPU 122. That is, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores and holds the information, but the payout side RAM 124 does not store and hold the information. The VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or is not connected to any electrical wiring.

As described above, the storage holding power from the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is supplied to the main RAM 114, but the capacity of the power supply unit 144 at the time of power failure is reduced by configuring the configuration so that it is not supplied to the payout side RAM 124. Is planned. As a result, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 that controls the launch of the game ball. The launch control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the conditions, a launch permission receiving circuit 147, and a launch IC 148.

The condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition-satisfying signal of a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a that detects that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is touched by the player, and the game even in a situation where the handle portion is rotated. A stop switch 31b, which is manually operated by the player to stop the firing of the ball, is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121, and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball rental connection terminal board 131.

The transmission circuit 146 for satisfying the condition receives a signal from the touch sensor 31a indicating that the handle portion is being touched by the player, and also receives a signal from the stop switch 31b indicating that the handle is not manually operated by the player. Further, when a signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, an HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition satisfaction signal (a signal that does not correspond to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

The firing permission receiving circuit 147 is HI-level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112, provided that the HI level condition satisfaction signal is transmitted from the condition-satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to a launch permission) and, when receiving the launch permission signal, continuously supplying a signal corresponding to the signal to the launch IC 148. When the main MPU 112 does not receive the HI level condition satisfying signal from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146, the main side MPU 112 transmits a LOW level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to the firing permission), but fires. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main MPU 112 newly starts transmitting the HI level launch permission signal each time it starts receiving the HI level condition satisfying signal, and when the reception of the HI level condition satisfying signal is completed, the HI level Ends the transmission of the launch permission signal.

When the launch IC 148 receives the HI level launch permission signal or the corresponding signal from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is for each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feed device 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function to output a drive signal on a regular basis.
In this case, the launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the launch solenoid 47 so that the game ball is launched after one game ball is supplied to the launch rail 45.

Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the firing IC 148 is based on the voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. Therefore, the larger the operation amount of the operation handle 31, the stronger the firing strength of the game ball by the firing solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

Next, the configuration in the electrical connection between the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

The voice lamp control device 92 includes a voice lamp control board 151, the voice lamp control board 151 is equipped with an MPU 152, and the MPU 152 has a ROM 153 and a RAM 154 built-in. In the following, the MPU 152, ROM 153 and RAM 154 provided in the voice lamp control device 92 will be described as the voice side MPU 152, the voice side ROM 153 and the voice side RAM 154.

The audio side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The audio side ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the audio side MPU 152, and has, for example, various data table storage areas 153a, command information storage area 153b, and the like.

The various data table storage areas 153a are areas in which light emission data, voice data, and the like are stored. The command information storage area 153b is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice side MPU 152 is stored.

The audio side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the audio side ROM 153. Then, the voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The voice side RAM 154 may include, for example, a command storage area 154a, a holding data area 154b, a holding ball presence flag storage area 154c, a holding device operation notification period timer counter area 154d, a first frame button invalidity counter area 154e, various counter areas 154f, and the like. have.

The command storage area 154a is an area for storing commands received from the main MPU 112. The retained data area 154b is data that is temporarily used to execute the effect and the notification during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and even after the effect and the notification are started, the voice side MPU 152 is used. It is an area for storing and holding data for making it available independently. The holding ball holding flag storage area 154c is an area in which the holding ball holding flag is stored when the holding ball is held in the holding device 210. The holding device operation notification period timer counter area 154d is an area in which the holding device operation notification period timer counter is stored, in which the period during which the holding device operation notification described later is displayed is set in the symbol display device 80. In the first frame button invalidity counter area 154e, the first frame button invalidity counter that counts the number of times the player continuously operates the first frame button 26 when the holding ball is not held in the holding device 210 This is the stored area. The various counter areas 154f are areas in which game counters and the like are stored.

Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (variation command, type command, fixed stop command, opening command, ending command, hold command, etc., which will be described later), the game times and open / close execution mode Decide the content of the production to be executed in the above. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to control the light emission of the illumination unit 33, and the sound output device 156 is controlled to control the sound of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Do.

A second frame button detection sensor 27a for detecting the operation of the second frame button 27 and a game ball passage detection sensor 206 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. Then, the voice side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the second frame button 27 is operated, and when the second frame button 27 is operated, the process corresponding to the operation is executed. Further, in the audio side MPU 152, when the game ball passes through the third guide passage 205 (when the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191) based on the result of the game ball passage detection sensor 206, specifically. Will be described later, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, light emission control of the corresponding lamp control device 155 and voice control of the voice output device 156 are performed, and a hold device operation notification command is transmitted to the display control device 93.

Further, the voice side MPU 152 identifies whether or not it is necessary to perform notification based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and voice control of the voice output device 156. Notify.

The various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later, but these various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. In addition, various commands are configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information on the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

Further, the audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93, and transmits various commands including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. For various commands output from the voice side MPU 152, the command information storage area 153b of the voice side ROM 153 is referred to. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive a command from the main control device 91 without going through the voice lamp control device 92, and the voice lamp control device is related to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side in the communication direction from 92.

The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, the display control board 161 has an MPU 162 mounted therein, and the MPU 162 has a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 built therein. Further, the display control board 161 contains a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. In the following, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display side MPU 162.

The program ROM 163 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory as read-only. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the display side MPU 162. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when a command is transmitted to the VDP 165, each effect. It has a data table storage area 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access as well as being capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. Then, the work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a.

Then, the display side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the voice lamp control device 92, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 165). To carry out.

The VDP165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP165 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timing of each of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc. to intervene in reading and writing the data, and reads the image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores it in the video RAM 167 according to the image data. The image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

The character ROM 166 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. Further, as a part of the above data, the character ROM 166 has image data to be displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Ds, the second reserved symbol display area Dt, and the execution reserved symbol display area Du of the symbol display device 80. The hold image data storage area 166a in which the image data is stored is set.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and share the image data and the like in each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 in the character ROM 166.

The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 167.

Further, the video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a. Then, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Ds1 to Ds4 of the first reserved symbol display area Ds in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RE1 to RE4 are set. Further, the reserved symbol display area 167a corresponds to the first to fourth display areas Dt1 to Dt4 of the second reserved symbol display area Dt in the symbol display device 80 on a one-to-one basis. Areas RF1 to RF4 are set. Further, in the reserved symbol display area 167a, an execution unit area RG is set so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the execution pending symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80. Then, in each of the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du, images corresponding to the data written in the respective unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG in the reserved symbol display area 167a are displayed. To. If no data is set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG (when data meaning a blank is set), the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, or RG are set. In each of the display areas Ds1 to Ds4, Dt1 to Dt4, and Du corresponding to the above, no image is displayed, or the background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are exchanged between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 by bidirectional communication. Specifically, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the first signal line group 170, and the first signal line group 170 is used to display from the voice side MPU 152. A command is sent to the side MPU 162. This command transmission is performed by serial communication, and the first signal line group 170 identifies the signal line 171 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 172 for a clock signal for performing the above and a signal line 173 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

Further, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are electrically connected by using the second signal line group 180, and the display side MPU 162 is connected to the voice side MPU 152 by using the second signal line group 180. The command is sent to. Since this command transmission is performed by serial communication, the second signal line group 180 includes a signal line 181 for serial command data transmission and each unit data (for example, one bit of data) included in the command data. At least a signal line 182 for a clock signal for identification and a signal line 182 for a latch signal for recognizing at least one of a transmission start and a transmission end of one command are included. In addition, a signal line for an enable signal for recognizing the start of command transmission may be separately provided.

The first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 are provided as one connection unit. The connection unit includes a connector in which one end of the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 is aggregated, and a connector in which the other end is aggregated, and one connector is an audio lamp control device. It is detachably attached to the connector of 92, and the other connector is detachably attached to the connector of the display control device 93.

The communication method between the voice side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 is not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication. Further, the first signal line group 170 and the second signal line group 180 may be provided as separate connection units.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning / failing lottery and the like.

At the time of the game, the main MPU 112 uses various counter information to perform a winning lottery, set the display of the main display unit 71, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 80, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the hit random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the winning type, and the reach when the symbol display device 80 deviates and fluctuates. The reach random number counter C3 used for the generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80. , The electric accessory open random number counter C4 used for drawing whether to set the electric accessory 63 in the electric accessory open state, and the random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4. Is used.
A part of each counter is updated at an interval of 4 msec, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 19) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 18) described later. The updated value is sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. Then, a predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 is sequentially stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b in the main RAM 114. , A predetermined value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114n of the main RAM 114.

Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c will be described.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 114b includes the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA having the first to fourth holding areas RA1 to RA4 and the first special symbol holding number storage area NA, and the first to fourth holding areas RB1. It has a second special symbol holding ball storage area RB having ~ RB4 and a second special symbol holding number storage area NB, a total holding number storage area NX, and one execution area RC. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a configuration of a first holding area RA1 in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA. The configurations of the second to fourth reserved areas RA2 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB, and the execution area RC are , The same as in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4, RB1 to RB4, and the execution area RC include a hit random number counter storage area 231, a hit type counter storage area 232, a reach random number counter storage area 233, and an execution area RC. It has a winning start opening storage area 234. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area RA, the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first starting port 54. , And each value of the reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) are stored in the hit random number counter storage area 231, the hit type counter storage area 232, and the reach random number counter storage area 233, and the first start port. The winning information for 54 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 234. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the first starting port 54, each of them is in the order of the first holding area RA1 → the second holding area RA2 → the third holding area RA3 → the fourth holding area RA4. Numerical information etc. are stored in chronological order. As described above, since the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is provided with the four holding areas RA1 to RA4, the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 54 can be stored up to a maximum of four as a whole. (Hold memory).

Similarly, in the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area RB, the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter are set in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the second starting port 55. Each value of C2 and reach random number counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 231, the hit type counter storage area 232, and the reach random number counter storage area 233, and the second start is performed. The winning information for the mouth 55 is stored in the winning start opening storage area 234. Then, when the winning of the game ball is continuously generated for the second starting port 55, the first holding area RB1 → the second holding area RB2 → the third holding area RB3 → the fourth holding area RB4, respectively. Numerical information etc. are stored in chronological order. As described above, since the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is provided with the four holding areas RB1 to RB4, the winning history of the game balls to the second starting port 55 can be stored up to a maximum of four as a whole. (Holded and stored).

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, up to 4 winning histories of the game balls to the 1st starting port 54 and the 2nd starting port 55 are stored, and therefore up to 8 are stored on hold as a whole. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the winning start port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (3 game balls in this embodiment) are not acquired. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the total number of items that can be stored on hold is set to 8, but the total number of items that can be stored on hold is not limited to 8, and is arbitrary, such as 4, 6, or. There may be other plurals such as 9 or more. Further, the number that can be stored and stored may be different between the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55.

When the execution area RC starts the variable display of the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b), each value stored in the first reserved area RA1 or the first reserved area RB1. This is an area for moving the player, and at the start of one game round, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RC.

In addition, the first special symbol holding number storage area NA provided in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is the holding number of the first lottery game (holding the variable display triggered by winning the first starting port 54). It is an area to store the number). Similarly, the second special symbol holding number storage area NB provided in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB has a variable display of the number of holdings of the second lottery game (a variation display triggered by winning a prize in the second starting port 55). This is an area for storing the number of held items). The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the number of sums (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c is the value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) according to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57. This is a hold area for storing in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 14, the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c is composed of four storage areas of the first to fourth holding areas RD1 to RD4, an execution area RD5, and a holding number storage area NC. Then, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57 are stored (held storage) by the four storage areas of the first to fourth reserved areas RD1 to RD4.

Specifically, when winning a prize to the normal symbol start gate 57 occurs continuously, the electric accessory is opened in the order of the first holding area RD1 → the second holding area RD2 → the third holding area RD3 → the fourth holding area RD4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order. By providing the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the normal symbol start gate 57 can be stored.

The execution area RD5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first hold area RD1. Then, when the open lottery of the electric accessory 63 is performed, a winning / failing determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RD5.

Even in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c, the number that can be held and stored is not limited to 4, but is arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as 2, 3, or 5 or more. It may be singular.

Returning to the explanation of the counter, various counters will be described in detail.

The hit random number counter C1 has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Then, especially when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and counting is started again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (winning lottery) is stored as a special symbol winning / failing table (winning / failing information group in the given information) in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a as the winning / losing information group storage means in the main ROM 113. There is. Here, the contents of the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. 16A and 16B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the special symbol winning / failing table in the present embodiment, FIG. 16A shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 16B shows a special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

As shown in FIG. 16, as the special symbol winning / failing table, the special symbol winning / failing table (low-probability winning / failing information group) for the low-probability mode of FIG. 16A and the high-probability mode of FIG. The special symbol winning / failing table (high-probability winning / failing information group) is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a low probability mode (low probability corresponding state) and a high probability mode (high probability corresponding state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16A, the value of the random number that wins the winning lottery under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery ( That is, the number of winning information) is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 16B, the value of the random number that wins the winning lottery (that is, winning). Information) is said to be 21 pieces. Further, in the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the low probability mode is the winning random number counter that wins the winning lottery in the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of C1. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The hit type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the given information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as the distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 113. 17A and 17B are diagrams for explaining a distribution table, in which FIG. 17A is a distribution table for the first result display unit (first distribution information group), and FIG. 17B is for the second result display unit. It is a distribution table (second distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 54. Further, the distribution table for the second result display unit is a table that is referred to when a distribution lottery is performed for the reserved information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 55.

In the distribution table for the first result display unit, as shown in FIG. 17 (a), as the distribution destination of the game result, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" Corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, "10 to 23" corresponds to the 4R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R normal hit result.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display unit, as shown in FIG. 17B, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0" is used as the distribution destination of the game result. "~ 23" corresponds to the 16R probability variation hit result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R normal hit result.

Here, the probability variation hit result in the present embodiment is a hit result in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, the normal winning result is a winning result in which the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the low probability mode (maintained) and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, the high frequency support mode in the normal hit result ends when the number of games reaches the end reference number (100 times in this embodiment) after the transition, and shifts to the low frequency support mode.

As will be described in detail later, the high-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is easy to open, and the low-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is difficult to open.

In the control of the variable winning device 56 in the open / close execution mode, a round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times. In addition, the round game is a condition that either a predetermined opening duration (opening duration) elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the large winning opening 56a. It is a game that continues until it is satisfied. For example, the opening duration is set to 30 sec, and the upper limit is set to 10.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 sec. Then, in each round game, the opening duration is set to be longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game balls and the maximum number of winning balls in one round game. Therefore, in each round game, it is expected that the maximum number of prizes in one round game will be awarded to the large winning opening 56a.

Here, to explain the various hit results described with reference to FIG. 17, the “4R probability variation hit result” is a game result in which the large winning opening 56a is opened four times, and the “16R probability variation hit result and 16R normal hit result”. Is the result of the game in which the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times.

Then, as described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when the winning lottery is won is the case where the winning lottery is won with the winning of the first starting port 54 as an opportunity. It is different from the case where the lottery is won by winning the prize in the second starting port 55. Specifically, the probability of winning the 16R probability variation when the first starting port 54 is won is lower than the probability of winning the 16R probability variation when the second starting port 55 is won. The 16R probability variation hit result can be said to be the most advantageous hit result because the large winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time mode. That is, the probability that the player can get more balls is higher when the player wins the prize when the second starting port 55 is won.

In addition, the "high probability mode" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a subsequent winning lottery is increased as an added value after the end of winning, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution mode). It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to the privilege game). The high-probability mode (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state (high-frequency support mode) in which the winning probability of a normal symbol is also increased and the game ball is likely to win a prize at the second starting port 55. The "low probability mode" refers to a case where the mode is not high probability mode (when the probability change is not in progress), and means a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of winning the winning lottery is lower than in the case of the probability change. ..

Further, as a support mode in the electric accessory 63, the electric accessory 63 is in an open state per unit time when compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area. A high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode or high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency support mode or low frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency is relatively high or low.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric accessory open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the high-frequency support The mode has a higher probability of winning the electric accessory open state than the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the electric accessory open state is won, the electric accessory 63 is opened more often in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode when the electric accessory release state is won. It is set, and one opening time is set longer. In this case, the electric accessory is in the open state in the high-frequency support mode, and when the electric accessory 63 is opened a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, it becomes easy for the game balls to win the second starting port 55, and when the game balls win the second starting port 55, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls held so much.

The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high-frequency support mode is set to the electric accessory open state per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. For example, the electric accessory is open. The probability of winning the electric accessory open state in the lottery may be equalized, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be appropriately set, and can be changed as appropriate.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game round to shift to the open / close execution mode, the main MPU 112 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and is a stop display result after the variable display in the game times in which the variable winning device 56 is in the open / close execution mode. In a game machine in which is a special display result, a variation that tends to be a special display result before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a display state.

Specifically, the reach display is a hit (open / close execution mode) by stopping and displaying some of the symbol strings among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a display state that displays the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may establish the combination of hit symbols corresponding to (shift to), and in that state, displays the fluctuation of the symbols in the remaining symbol rows. is there.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to end the variable display of the symbol, a combination of hit symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be displayed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence. ..

More specifically, with reference to FIG. 6, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the variation display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. In, the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, or the main symbol with the number "3" in the upper symbol row Z1 and the number "1" in the lower symbol row Z3 of the effective line L2 is stopped and displayed. By doing so, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variation display of the symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row) in the middle row, so that the reach display is obtained. Then, when the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. The fluctuation display of is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol strings are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 80a after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS has a variation display time (display duration) in the main display unit 71 (first result display unit 71a or second result display unit 71b) and a variation display time (display duration) of the symbol in the symbol display device 80. ) Is used to determine in the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of the variation display on the main display unit 71 and at the start of the symbol variation by the symbol display device 80. Then, when determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. ..

The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to 0. Then, when the electric accessory open random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the count is counted again from the initial value. It will be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory open random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57.

The value of the random number that wins the normal symbol is stored as the normal symbol win / loss table (win / fail information group) in the normal symbol win / fail table storage area 113f as the win / loss information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values for winning a normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is "5 to 28". Further, in the high probability mode, it is set to 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the low probability mode, when the value of the acquired electric accessory release random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined to be a winner, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric accessory release random number counter If the value of C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined to be a winner. Then, a predetermined lighting state is indicated on the other display unit 71d of the main display unit 71, and the electric accessory 63 is opened.

<About various processes executed by MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, the main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the power is turned on to the main control device 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait processing, wait processing (for example, peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) is waited for the sub-side control devices (voice lamp control device 92, display control device 93, payout control device 100, and the like) to become operable. 1 sec) is executed, and the process waits without proceeding to the next process. Then, after the power-on wait processing period has elapsed, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

After that, when it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and firing control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). , It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105: YES), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (S106), and the checksum is used as the power supply. It is determined whether or not the checksum is the same as the checksum saved at the time of blocking, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

Then, when it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), the power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set to the initial value, and the current gaming state (the state before the power-off is normal if the power-off is normal). A command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92 in order to recognize. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that "1" is not set in the power failure flag (S105: NO), or when it is determined that the checksum is not normal. In the case (S107: NO), after clearing the main RAM 114 as the initialization of the main RAM 114 (S108), the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 103. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to the process of S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and retained by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to the same step 108.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 103 is not pressed, the step 108 is not executed, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Execute 109. That is, if the power off is normal and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the gaming state of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92.

After that, the process proceeds to the following residual processing. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) described later, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, and the following residual processing is repeatedly executed by utilizing this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following residual processing is irregular processing that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 114, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, an interrupt enable setting for switching from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the process of steps 110 to 113 is executed.

Here, as described above, in the residual processing, the random number initial value update processing and the fluctuation counter update processing are only set so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt enable processing. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing Is always started immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt processing is completed, it is always sufficient to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt processing becomes unique. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of the predetermined data in the main MPU 112, the main data stored in the register of the main MPU 112 at that time is stored at the start of the timer interrupt processing. It is not necessary to execute the save process to the side RAM 114, and similarly, it is not necessary to execute the data return process to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt processing is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt processing is also reduced.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing is performed even though these are being updated. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 112 on a regular basis (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and is further present at an intermediate position of a signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. .. That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of 4 msec, which is a specific period. The main MPU 112 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as rising or falling of this pulse signal, and activates timer interrupt processing on the condition that the occurrence of a specific signal form is confirmed as at least one condition. And execute.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer changes from the state in which the interrupt is prohibited to the state in which the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the processing execution status of the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt processing may be started after 4.1 msec has elapsed from the start of the previous timer interrupt processing, and when such an event occurs, the next timer interrupt processing may be started. The next timer interrupt processing will be started after 3.9 msec has elapsed from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt processing.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency divider circuit is performed in a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the process in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt process is basically started in the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is next to the predetermined timing even if the timer interrupt processing at the predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific cycle has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started. The timer interrupt processing at the timing of is absorbed by the amount exceeding the specific cycle, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing on the main MPU 112.

The main MPU 112 first executes the power failure information storage process (S201). In this power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 117, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, a predetermined power failure time process is executed.

Next, the lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory open random number counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0".

After that, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main process (FIG. 18) (S203), and the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main process (FIG. 18) (S203). S204). Next, the game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation should stop the progress of the game, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

Specifically, various sensors (other detection sensors 115 in FIG. 11) such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the game machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not the act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by the fraud detection process (S212) described later, and detects the radio wave. It is determined whether or not an illegal radio wave is output to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the sensor, and an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. Judge whether or not there is. If an affirmative determination is made by any of these fraud determinations, it is assumed that a specific event corresponding to the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred, and the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped.

After that, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and if it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. Process is executed (S207). In the output processing of the notification command, the notification command is set as the output target when any specific event has occurred and the notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the execution setting of the notification corresponding to the content of the specific event is performed. In addition, the state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the corresponding notification are restarted when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is supplied. By starting the supply of operating power while manually operating the RAM erasing switch 103 provided in the power supply and the firing control device 101 after stopping, the main RAM 114 is not executed when the initialization of the main RAM 114 is executed. Become.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output processing, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt processing, the output processing corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information to switch the large winning opening 56a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output is started. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 63 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit 63a is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. Further, the command set as the output target in each process is output to the voice lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

Next, the reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Subsequently, it is received from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a that detect the winning of the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57. The winning signal is read, and the winning detection process for specifying whether or not the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57 has been won is executed (S210). ).

After that, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if a fraud determination is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined event has occurred and a positive determination is made, the game is played in step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Make settings for stopping. As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step 206. As described in step 205, the predetermined event is whether or not the act of bringing the magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and the illegal radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not, whether or not an illegal vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined launch cycle, in a situation where the launch operation is continued for the operation handle 31. Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, input for confirming the disconnection of each of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, confirming the opening of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, etc. A state monitoring process is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when it is confirmed that the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a are disconnected, or when the opening of the game machine main body 12 is confirmed, the notification is given in the same manner as in step 207. Executes command output processing. In the output processing of the notification command, a notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a are disconnected and a notification command indicating that the game machine main body 12 is in the open state are transmitted. Send. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If a positive judgment is made in these judgments, a notification command corresponding to the judgment is set as an output target.

Next, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times (variable display times) and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 63 is performed. The general electric control process is executed (S216). The special figure special electric control process in step 215 and the normal figure general electric control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

Subsequently, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps 215 and 216, the number of reserved information (first and second special symbol reserved number storage areas NA, NB) for winning the first and second starting ports 55 is increased or decreased. , And display control processing (setting of output information) for reflecting the increase / decrease number of hold information (hold number storage area NC) for winning a prize at the normal symbol start gate 57 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d). (S217). Further, when shifting to the open / close execution mode, the number of times the variable winning device 56 in the open / close execution mode is opened is reflected in the round display unit 71c based on the round setting process (FIG. 30) described later. Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed. Further, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (turning off) the display of the round display unit 71c is performed.

Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the open / close execution mode is executed, a demo display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 80 for standby display is executed (S218). The demo display process will be described in detail later.

Then, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout side MPU 122 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). In addition, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

Next, in order to switch the state of the signal output to the external output terminal board 104 so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of various processes executed in the timer interrupt processing this time. The external information setting process is executed (S221).

Subsequently, the reserved ball detection process is executed (S222). Here, the reserved ball detection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the holding ball detection process.

In the holding ball detection process, first, based on the signal from the holding ball detection sensor 210d, it is determined whether or not the holding ball is held by the holding device 210 (S301). In the present embodiment, as described above, the holding ball detection sensor 210d is arranged so as to detect the holding ball held on the bottom 210b. Therefore, in step 301, it is determined whether or not at least one holding ball is held in the holding device 210.

Then, when it is determined that the holding ball is held in the holding device 210 (S301: YES), the holding ball possession command is transmitted to the voice side MPU 152 (S302), and the holding ball is held in the holding device 210. If it is determined that there is no such command (S301: NO), the hold ball no command is transmitted to the voice side MPU 152 (S303). After that, the command information transmitted to the voice side MPU 152, that is, the information on the presence or absence of the holding ball is stored in the register of the main side MPU 112 (S304), and the holding ball detection process is terminated. The processing content of the voice side MPU 152 by receiving the command with the holding ball or the command without the holding ball will be described later.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), after executing the hold ball detection process in step 222, the process corresponding to the first frame button is executed (S223). Here, the process corresponding to the first frame button will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to the first frame button.

In the first frame button correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the first frame button operation has been performed (S401). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated is determined by the signal from the first frame button detection sensor 26a.

When it is determined that the first frame button 26 has been operated (S401: YES), whether or not the holding ball is held in the holding device 210 based on the information stored in step 304 of the holding ball detection process (FIG. 20). (S402). Then, when it is determined that the holding ball is held by the holding device 210 (S402: YES), the value of the holding device movable period timer counter stored in the holding device movable period timer counter area 114m of the main RAM 114 is set. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the holding device movable period timer counter is 0 (S403). That is, in step 405 described later, when the holding device 210 is moved to perform the holding ball ejection process, the holding device movable period timer counter is set to one movable period of the holding device 210 (bottom 210b). By determining whether or not the holding device movable period timer counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the holding device 210 is moving.

Then, when it is determined that the holding device movable period timer counter is 0 (S403: YES), the holding ball ejection process is executed (S404). Specifically, in this holding ball discharging process, the holding device driving unit 210c is controlled, the bottom 210b is opened and the holding ball is discharged, and then the bottom 210b is closed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the bottom 210b is controlled so as to eject only one holding ball by one movement (open state → closed state).

After executing the hold ball discharge process in step 404, the hold device movable period timer counter is set with the hold device movable period (S405). As a result, in step 403, when the holding device 210 (bottom 210b) is moving, a negative determination is made. That is, in the determination in step 403, when the player continuously operates the first frame button 26 or the player operates the first frame button 26 by determining whether or not the holding device 210 is moving. If you continue to operate (hold down), a negative judgment is made, and by preventing the bottom 210 from being maintained in the open state, a plurality of reserved balls are not ejected at the same time. The holding device movable period is a period from when the bottom 210b is changed from the closed state to the closed state and then returned to the closed state. The numerical value of the holding device movable period timer counter is updated (subtracted) by the timer in step 211. It is executed in the update process.

After that, the holding device movable command is transmitted to the voice side MPU 152 (S406), and the process corresponding to the first frame button is completed. The process of receiving the hold device movable command by the voice side MPU 152 will be described later, but briefly, the voice side MPU 152 determines whether or not it is the timing to operate the hold device 210, and the determination is made. Light emission control and voice control are performed according to the above, and a holding device movable command according to the determination is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. Further, the process of receiving the holding device movable command by the display side MPU 162 will be described later, but the display side MPU 162 displays characters and the like corresponding to the received holding device movable command on the symbol display device 80 (FIG. 52, FIG. (See FIG. 53).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step 402 that the holding ball is not held by the holding device 210 (S402: NO), the first frame button invalid command is transmitted to the voice side MPU 152 (S407). The processing caused by the voice side MPU 152 receiving the first frame button invalid command will be described later, but briefly, the voice side MPU 152 counts the number of times the first frame button invalid command is received, and the specified number of times. When it reaches, the holding device 210 performs light emission control and voice control for notifying that the holding ball is not held, and transmits a holding ball no command to the display side MPU 162. Further, the processing caused by the display side MPU 162 receiving the hold ball no command will be described later, but the display side MPU 162 is a character for notifying that the hold ball is not held by the hold device 210, similarly to the voice side MPU 152. Etc. are displayed on the symbol display device 80 (see FIG. 54).

If it is determined that the first frame button 26 is not operated (S401: NO), or if it is determined that the holding device movable period timer counter is not 0 (S403: NO), the first frame button is used as it is. End the corresponding process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), after executing the process corresponding to the first frame button in step 223 or after completing the process for outputting the notification command in step 207, the interrupt end declaration is set. (S224). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that the interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing, and in step 224, the next Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the execution of timer interrupt processing. Next, the interrupt permission is set (S225). Once the timer interrupt processing is started, the main MPU 112 is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step 225, the interrupt permission is set in order to enable the execution of the next timer interrupt processing. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, the special figure special electric control process of step 215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 is won, the process for acquiring the hold information is executed, and when the hold information is stored. A pass / fail judgment is made for the held information, and a process for performing a game rounding effect is executed with the pass / fail judgment as an opportunity. In addition, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round is executed, and the process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, the process of acquiring the pending information is executed (S501). Here, the process of acquiring the pending information will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information.

The process of acquiring the hold information determines whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, and if the game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, the game ball has won a prize. This is a process of storing each of the acquired counter values in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b up to the maximum number of holdings (up to 4 in each of the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and a maximum of 8 in total). Further, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b, the winning / failing judgment result, the selected fluctuation pattern, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is a process to do.

First, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 54 is determined based on the detection information of the winning detection sensor 54a (S601). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first start opening 54 (there was a start prize) (S601: YES), the value of the hold number Na stored in the first special symbol hold number storage area NA is read out. It is determined whether or not the acquired number of pending Na is less than 4 (S602). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings for the first starting port 54 is less than 4, which is the upper limit value (that is, whether the number of holdings is stored up to the upper limit value).

Then, when it is determined that the acquired number of holds Na is less than 4 (S602: YES), the number of holds Na of the first special symbol hold number storage area NA is added by 1, and the total number of holds storage area NX is added. The total number of reservations Nx is read, and the total number of reservations Nx is added by 1 (S603). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired number of pending Na is 4 (S602: NO), the acquisition process of the present pending information is terminated as it is.

After the processing of step 603 is completed, each numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19), the first start. The information that the winning of the mouth 54 is a trigger is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Na added by 1 in step 603 of the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA (S604).

After that, the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are made to recognize that the first start port 54 has been won, and the hold command setting process, which is a process for executing the hold notification, is executed (S605). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 54 (S601: NO), the winning detection sensor 55a determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 55 (starting winning). Judgment is made based on the detection information of (S606). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second start opening 55 (there was a start prize) (S606: YES), the same processing as in steps 602 to 605 is performed (S607 to S610). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second starting port 55 (S606: NO), the acquisition process of the present hold information is terminated as it is.

It should be noted that the processes of steps 607 to 610 differ only in the processes for winning the second starting port 55 from the processes from steps 602 to 605, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In step 607, the value of the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is read and determined, and in step 608, the reserved number Nb of the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is added by 1 and totaled. The total number of holds Nx in the hold number storage area NX is added by 1, and in step 609, the numerical information (special information) of each counter C1 to C3 and the information that a prize is given to the second starting port 55 are added. , The second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is stored in the holding area corresponding to the holding number Nb added by 1 in step 608.

The above is the process of acquiring the pending information. Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step 501, the special figure special electric counter information is input from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. The read process is executed (S502). Further, the process of reading the special figure special electric address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S503), and the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. The process is executed (S504).

As described above, the special figure special electric control process includes the process related to the effect for the game round and the process related to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the game round, the special figure variation start process (S507), which is the process for starting the effect for the game round, and the process for advancing the effect for the game round. The figure-changing process (S508) and the special figure-determining process (S509), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, are set. Further, as the processes related to the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (S510), which is a process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the special electric open, which is a process for controlling the open state of the grand prize opening 56a, are being performed. Controls the process (S511), the special electric closing process (S512), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the large winning opening 56a, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the transition of the game state at the end of the open / close execution mode. The special electric power termination process (S513), which is a process for performing the operation, is set.

In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

Explaining the special figure special electric address table with reference to FIG. 24, the special figure special electric counter can set numerical information of "0" to "6", and the special figure special electric address table has the special figure special electric counter. Information on the start address (“SA0” to “SA6”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determination processing, the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric start processing, and the start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric open processing. The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric closing processing, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric end processing. ..

The special figure special electric counter controls the special figure special electric power in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or "0" is cleared (initialized) according to the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric control processing in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the processing according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric counter.

According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to grasp which process should be executed as the special figure special electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, the effect for game times is started when the effects for other game times are not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the game times In the process related to the effect for the game, before starting the effect for the game, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game is being executed is set, and the open / close execution mode is being executed. It becomes necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the flag is set. In addition, during the execution of the effect for the game round, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is being executed is set, and the flag indicating that the confirmation display is being performed is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not it is.

Further, the open / close execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and the other open / close execution modes are not executed. However, if each state is to be determined by the presence or absence of the flag, the open / close execution mode is related. In the process, before starting the open / close execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game round is completed is set, and the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it has been set, and if it is being opened, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that it is being opened is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not the flag indicating that the open / close execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not the flag indicating that the large winning opening 56a is being opened is set. It will be necessary to confirm whether or not.
Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

On the other hand, if the special figure special electric counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for confirming the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the special figure special electric counter and the special figure special electric address table, special figure fluctuation start processing (S507), special figure fluctuation processing (S508), special figure finalizing processing (S509), special electric power start processing (S510). ), The special electric power opening process (S511), the special electric power closing process (S512), and the special electric power ending process (S513) will be described.

First, after acquiring the start address of step 504, the setting process for the zero flag is executed (S505). In the setting process to the zero flag, the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is read based on the read numerical information. To set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0". If it is not "0", "0" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" and the zero flag is "1", the zero flag is changed from "1" to "0". The special figure special electric timer counter is a counter used for specifying the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time by the main MPU 112, and is the timer in step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). Numerical information is subtracted in the update process.

Subsequently, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 504 is executed (S506). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, it jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process (S507), and when the acquired start address is SA1, it jumps to the special figure change process (S508). If the acquired start address is SA2, it jumps to the special figure confirmation processing (S509), and if the acquired start address is SA3, it jumps to the special electric start processing (S510), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, it jumps to the special electric power opening process (S511), if the acquired start address is SA5, it jumps to the special electric power closing process (S512), and if the acquired start address is SA6. Jump to the special electric end processing (S513). Then, when the processes of steps 507 to 513 are executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Each process of step 507 to step 513 will be described below individually.

First, the special figure variation start processing in step 507 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start processing. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on condition that the hold information is stored, and the process for starting the game round in which the variation display is performed on the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Execute.

First, the value of the total number of reservations Nx is read from the total number of reservations storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired number of reservations Nx is 1 or more (S701). Then, when it is determined that the total number of reserved numbers Nx is 0 (S701: NO), the present special figure fluctuation start processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of pending numbers Nx is 1 or more (S701: YES), the data setting process is executed (S702). Here, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In the present embodiment, as described above, it is more likely that the player will be advantageous if the player wins the prize when the second starting port 55 is won (see FIG. 17). When there is hold information about the lottery game, priority digestion is performed to preferentially shift the hold information about the second lottery game to the execution area RC.

Specifically, in this data setting process, first, the value of the hold number Nb is read from the second special symbol hold number storage area NB, and it is determined whether or not the acquired hold number Nb is 1 or more (S801). .. Then, when it is determined that the hold number Nb is 1 or more (S801: YES), the hold number Nb is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1 (S802). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RB1 in the second special symbol hold ball storage area RB is shifted to the execution area RC (S803). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area RB is shifted (S804). Specifically, the process of step 804 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RB1 to RB4 to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first reserved area RB1. , 2nd hold area RB2 → 1st hold area RB1, 3rd hold area RB3 → 2nd hold area RB2, 4th hold area RB4 → 3rd hold area RB3, and so on.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number Nb is not 1 or more (S801: NO), that is, when only the hold number Na is 1 or more, the hold number Na is subtracted by 1 and the total hold number Nx is subtracted by 1. S805). Next, the data (that is, the hold information) stored in the first hold area RA1 in the first special symbol hold ball storage area RA is shifted to the execution area RC (S806). After that, the data (that is, the holding information) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area RA is shifted (S807). Specifically, this process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first reserved area RA1 and the first. 2 Hold area RA2 → 1st hold area RA1, 3rd hold area RA3 → 2nd hold area RA2, 4th hold area RA4 → 3rd hold area RA3, and so on, the data in each area is shifted.

After executing the shift process of step 804 or after executing the shift process of step 807, the data of the first to fourth reserved areas RA1 to RA4 have been shifted, or the first to fourth reserved areas have been executed. A shift command for causing the voice lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data of RB1 to RB4 has been shifted is set as an output target (S808). The shift command set in step 808 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19).

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 25), after executing the data setting process of step 702, the hit / fail determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S703). In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the high-probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is the high-probability mode. judge. Then, when it is determined that the mode is in the high probability mode, the special symbol winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 16B) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 231) is the hit numerical information for the high probability mode. Determine if they match. Further, when it is determined that the mode is in the low probability mode, the special symbol winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 16A) stored in the special symbol winning / failing table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113 is referred to. Of the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for determining whether or not the result is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 231) is the hit numerical information for the low probability mode. Determine if they match. The high-probability mode flag is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the probability variation hit result (FIG. 33, S1503), and then erased at the end of the open / close execution mode due to the normal hit result (FIG. 33, S1503). S1504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process is the winning result (S704). If it is determined that the winning result is (S704: YES), the distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S705). In the distribution determination process, among the information stored in the execution area RC, the information for distribution determination, that is, the numerical information regarding the winning type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the winning type counter storage area 232) and the winning prize. Grasp the information of the starting port. Then, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 grasped above (numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 232). Identify which hit result corresponds to. Specifically, in the case where a prize is won in the first starting port 54, the 16R probability variation hit result is obtained with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (FIG. 17A). It is specified which of the 4R probability variation hit result and the 16R normal hit result corresponds to. Further, when the winning of the second starting port 55 is a trigger, the 16R probability variation hit result or the 16R normal is referred to with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 17B) for the second result display unit. Identify which of the winning results corresponds to the winning result.

After that, the stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (S706). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern (lighting state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the fluctuation this time is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. It is specified from the stop result table for the hit result, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for the hit result, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 is set differently for each type of the hit result.

Next, the flag storage process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S707). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the hit result specified in step 705 among the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S704: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (S708). Specifically, the information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113 for the deviation result. The stop result table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the mode of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the pattern selected in the case of the winning result.

After executing any of the processes of step 707 and step 708, the process of grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) is executed (S709). In this process, the numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the fluctuation this time are the winning results, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, although it is neither a hit result, the numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RC (numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 233) is the numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence. In that case, it is determined that the reach display occurs.

When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the variation display time table for the reach generation stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS this time is supported. The variable display time information is acquired, and the type of reach (normal reach or super reach) is determined.

The normal reach in the present embodiment is a reach in which the variation display time is short, and after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the interrupted symbol row Z2 is stopped as it is ( This is the so-called “bite stop) fluctuation (see FIG. 6 for the symbol sequence). The super reach is a reach that has a longer variable display time than the normal reach, and indicates to the player that the player has a high expectation that a hit result will be generated in the game times. For example, the reach is displayed after the normal reach. To. In the present embodiment, when the game times this time is a winning result, the probability of selecting the super reach is higher than when it is not a winning result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variation display time table for non-reach generation, which is stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113, is referred to, and the variation type counter CS of this time is used. Acquires variable display time information corresponding to numerical information.

The variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach generation is different from the variation display time that can be acquired by referring to the variation display time table for reach occurrence. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time when the reach does not occur is set so as to become shorter as the total number of pending numbers Nx increases. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected as compared with the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. The time is set.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time may not fluctuate according to the total number of holds Nx and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. Further, in the case of various hit results, a variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of out-reach and the case of out-of-reach non-occurrence (complete off). In this case, the variable display time is distributed according to each game result.

Next, the information on the fluctuation display time acquired in step 709 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in the special figure special electric timer counter area 114e (S710). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process (S211) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). Further, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 80 are performed, and when each of these variable displays is completed, the game round is performed. In the state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line), the confirmation display (final stop display) is performed over the confirmation time (final stop time).
In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 709 is the total time for one game minus the fixed time. In this respect, the variable display time can be rephrased as the time before the confirmation (the time before the final stop).

Subsequently, the variation command and the type command are set as output targets (S711). The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table is the variation display time acquired by referring to the reach generation variation display time table. The variable display time acquired by normal reach is also different from the variable display time acquired by super reach. Therefore, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach, the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, generates reach from the information on the fluctuation display time. It is possible to identify the presence or absence of.
In this respect, it can be said that the variable command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred and information on the type of reach. Note that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred and information that directly indicates the type of reach.

Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 16R probability variation hit result, the 4R probability variation hit result, and the 16R normal hit result as the game result information. The variation command and the type command set as output targets in step 711 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 92, which is the control device on the sub side, by the port output process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). Will be done.

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g (S712), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is stored (S712: YES), it is provided in the main RAM 114. The time reduction counter stored in the time reduction counter area 114h is decremented by 1 (S713). The time reduction counter is set to a specified number of times (100 in the present embodiment) after the ending time in the open / close execution mode resulting from the 16R normal hit result has elapsed (FIGS. 33, S1505).

After subtracting 1 from the time reduction counter, or when it is determined that the time reduction flag is not stored (S712: NO), the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 71 is started (S714), and the special figure special electric counter is turned on. Add 1 (S715). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the processing of step 715 is executed. ". After that, the special figure fluctuation start processing is completed.

Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step 508 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure. The special figure change processing is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the variation display time in the production for this game round has elapsed ( S901). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" and the zero flag is set to "1" is the fluctuation display time in the production for this game round. It means that it has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S901: NO), the main display unit 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so that the update timing of the main display unit 71 (update of the light emission pattern) It is determined whether or not it is (timing) (S902). Then, when it is determined that it is not the update timing (S902: NO), the processing during the change of the special figure is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the update timing is reached (S902: YES), the update content reading process is executed (S903). For this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113i of the main ROM 113.

Next, an update process is executed in which the update content read in step 903 is set for the update of the main display unit 71 (S904). The process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 71 is executed by the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S901: YES), the fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as the output target (S905). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the effect for the current game round.

Then, the process of reading the stop result is executed (S906). In the read-out process, at the start of the current game round, the information of the mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed, which is set in the main RAM 114 in step 706 or step 708 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 25), is read out. After that, an update process is executed in which the information on the mode of the read pattern is set for updating the main display unit 71 (S907).

Subsequently, the information of the fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the fixed time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S908). Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S909). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1" when the special figure changing processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the processing of step 909 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the change of this special figure is terminated.

Next, the process during special figure determination in step 509 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing during the determination of the special figure. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the production for this game round has elapsed (S1001). ). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the fixed time has passed in the production for this game. It means that you did. If it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S1001: NO), the processing during the determination of this special figure is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the fixed time has passed (S1001: YES), the winning / failing determination that triggered the current game is determined by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result of is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers a transition to the open / close execution mode) (S1002). In the various hit result flag storage areas 114k, the flags corresponding to the hit results are stored in the flag storage process of step 707 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 25).

When it is determined that the result is a hit (S1002: YES), the opening command is set as the output target (S1003). The opening command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. The opening command also includes information on the type of hit result (16R probability variation hit result, 4R probability variation hit result, 16R normal hit result) that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the opening time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1004). Then, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1005). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "2" when the special figure finalizing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the process of step 1005 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a hit result (S1002: NO), that is, when the result of the hit / fail judgment that triggered the game round this time is a wrong result (that is, a result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode). Is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 1 or more (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the time reduction counter is 0 (S1006: NO), if the time reduction flag is stored in the time reduction flag storage area 114g, the time reduction flag is deleted (S1007). After clearing the time saving flag, or when it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter is 1 or more (S1006: YES), the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S1008). After that, the processing during the determination of this special figure is completed.

Next, the special electric start processing of step 510 in the special electric special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special electric power start processing. The special electric power start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "3".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current open / close execution mode has elapsed (S1101). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode has passed. Means. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S1101: NO), the special electric train start process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S1101: YES), a round setting for setting the number of rounds corresponding to various hit results in the round counters provided in the other various counter areas 114n of the main RAM 114. Process (S1102). The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one open / close execution mode by the main MPU 112, and one round is consumed in the open / close execution mode of the round number specified mode. "1" is subtracted each time.

Here, the setting process for the round of step 1102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the round.

First, "10" is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in the winning counters provided in the other various counter areas 114n of the main RAM 114 (S1201). The winning counter is a counter in which "1" is subtracted each time a game ball is won in the large winning opening 56a.

Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the special electric start processing is the 16R probability variation hit result. (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the result is not the 16R probability variation hit result (S1202: NO), it is determined whether or not the result is the 16R normal hit result (S1203).

When it is determined that the result is a 16R probability variation hit (S1202: YES), and when it is determined that the result is a 16R normal hit result (S1203: YES), after setting "16" in the round counter (S1204), this End the setting process for the round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 16R normal hit result is not (S1203: NO), the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114k indicate the 4R probability variation hit result, so that the round counter is set to "4". After setting (S1205), the setting process for this round ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special electric power start process (FIG. 29), after completing the setting process for the round in step 1102, the first opening 56a according to the winning result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is opened. Read the duration information (S1103). In addition, in this embodiment, the initial opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1104).

Next, an opening setting process for opening the large winning opening 56a is executed (S1105). In this open setting process, "1" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started in order to switch the large winning opening 56a to the open state.

Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1106). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "3" when the special electric start process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 1106 is executed. Become. After that, the special electric train start process is completed.

Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step 511 in the special power special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing during the opening of the special electric power. The processing during opening of the special electric power is the processing after the special electric power start processing, and the numerical information of the special electric power counter is "4".

First, by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the opening duration in the current round game has elapsed (S1301). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. In order to set "1", the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

When it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1301: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1302). Subsequently, the closing time information (for example, 1 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the closing time information is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1303). Then, a closing setting process for closing the large winning opening 56a is executed (S1304). In the closing setting process, "0" is set in the register related to the large winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is stopped in order to switch the large winning port 56a to the closed state.

Next, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1305). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing during opening of the special electric power is executed is "4", the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the processing of step 1305 is executed is "5". Become. After that, the processing during the opening of this special electric train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening duration has not elapsed (S1301: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the large winning opening 56a based on the detection information from the winning detection sensor 56c (S1306). ), If it is determined that there is no winning in the large winning opening 56a (S1306: NO), the processing during the opening of this special electric train is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a prize in the large prize opening 56a (S1306: YES), the prize counter is subtracted by 1 (S1307). After that, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is "0" (S1308), and if it is determined to be "0" (S1308: YES), the present is performed after the processing of steps 1302 to 1305 is executed. Ends processing while the special electric power is open. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (S1308: NO), the processing during the opening of this special electric power is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing during closing of the special electric power in step 512 in the special drawing special electric power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the processing during closing of the special electric train. The special electric power closing process is a process after the special electric power opening process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "5".

First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is "0" (S1401). If the round counter is not "0" (S1401: NO), has the closing time passed by checking whether "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112? Whether or not it is determined (S1402). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" and the zero flag is set to "1" means that the closing time has passed. If it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1402: NO), the processing during closing of this special electric train is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1402: YES), "10" is set in the winning counter (S1403). Subsequently, the read processing of the open duration is executed (S1404). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114k, the result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out and based on these. The information on the duration for opening the large winning opening 56a is read out. In the pachinko machine 10, the opening duration is set to correspond to a long time mode in all rounds in each hit result. Then, the read information on the open duration is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1405).

Subsequently, the open setting process is executed (S1406). The processing content of the open setting process is the same as the open setting process of step 1105 in the special electric start process (FIG. 29). Next, the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (S1407). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special electric power closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "4" when the process of step 1407 is executed. It becomes. After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is "0" (S1401: YES), the ending command is set as the output target (S1408). The ending command is a command for causing the voice lamp control device 92, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the open / close execution mode.

Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electric timer counter (S1409). Subsequently, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (S1410). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "5" when the special figure closing process is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" when the process of step 1410 is executed. ". After that, the processing during the closure of this special train is completed.

Next, the special electric power termination process of step 513 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the special electric power termination process. The special electric power end process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is "6".

First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by confirming whether or not "1" is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1501). That is, in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), in step 505, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", and if it is "0", the zero flag is set. Since "1" is set, the situation where "1" is set in the zero flag in the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "6" means that the ending time has passed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1501: NO), the special train termination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1501: YES), the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is set to the various hit result flag storage areas 114k of the main RAM 114. With reference to the flag stored in, it is determined whether or not the result is a probability variation hit (S1502). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation hit result (16R probability variation hit result or 4R probability variation hit result) (S1502: YES), the high probability mode flag is set in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114. If it is not stored, the high probability mode flag is stored (S1503). On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode that ended this time is not a probability variation hit result (16R normal hit result) (S1502: NO), the high probability mode flag is stored. If so, after erasing the high probability mode flag (S1504), the time saving flag is stored in the time saving flag storage area 114g of the main RAM 114 (if the time saving flag is already stored, the time saving flag is maintained as it is) and the time saving is performed. “100” is set in the time saving number counter in the number counter area 114h (S1505). In the process of step 1503 or step 1505, the flags indicating the information corresponding to the types of hit results are also deleted from the various hit result flag storage areas 114k. After executing the process of step 1503 or step 1505, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (S1506), and the special electric end process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special electric control process is executed by using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter.
For this reason, when the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games composed of the effect for game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, the special figure special electric counter may be referred to. It is not necessary to check multiple flags at each processing timing as in. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, in each of the processes of steps 507 to 513, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for ending a certain situation and performing a transition to the next situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, "0", which is the initial value of the special figure special electric counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of game situations including the effect for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to set the first situation in the above series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter after the initialization of the main RAM 114 or the like.

Further, when updating the special figure special electric counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

Further, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above series of game situations is set separately from each process of steps 507 to 513, and refer to the special figure special electric counter. It is not included in each process executed. As a result, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is set at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information can be simplified.

Further, among the processes of steps 507 to 513, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period is measured by using a common period measuring means called a special figure special electric timer counter. The measurement is done. As a result, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situations corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter do not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is referred to at the same time in a plurality of situations. There is no such thing, and the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

Further, the process of updating the special figure special electric timer counter is executed by the timer update process in step 211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) set as a process different from steps 507 to 513. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electric timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps 507 to 513.

Further, confirmation of whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" is collectively performed in step 505 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 22), and in each process of step 508 to step 513, it is performed. The passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112.
As a result, as compared with the case where the numerical information is read from the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 114 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is "0" in each process of step 508 to step 513. The processing configuration can be simplified.

Here, the special figure special figure counter is referred to in order to confirm which situation is in a series of games including the effect for game rotation and the open / close execution mode even in the process other than the special figure special figure control process. To. For example, the special electric special figure counter is also referred to in the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19), and the demo display process will be described later.

Next, the normal drawing control processing executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the Fuzu Fuden control process.

In the normal symbol control process, when a prize has been awarded to the normal symbol start gate 57, a process for acquiring the hold information of the normal symbol is executed, and the hold information of the normal symbol is stored. In addition, the release determination of the electric accessory 63 is performed for the hold information, and further, the release determination is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing an effect for a normal symbol. Further, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 63 is executed based on the result of the opening determination.

Specifically, first, the process of acquiring the hold information of the ordinary symbol is executed (S1601). In the acquisition process, the numerical information of the electric accessory open random number counter C4 (that is, the hold information of the normal symbol) is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 57. Execute the process to be performed. It should be noted that the acquisition of the hold information of the ordinary symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of hold (4 in this embodiment).

Next, a process of reading the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden counter area 114i of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1602), and the Fuzu Fuden address table storage area 113h of the main ROM 113 executes the Fuzu Fuden. The process of reading the information in the address table is executed (S1603). Then, the process of acquiring the start address corresponding to the information of the Fuzu Fuden counter from the Fuzu Fuden address table is executed (S1604).

Explaining the processing contents of steps 1602 to 1604, as described above, the fuzu-fuden control process includes a process related to the effect for the fuzu and a process related to opening and closing of the electric accessory 63. In this case, as the processing related to the effect for the normal map, the normal map fluctuation start process, the normal map change process, and the normal map finalization process are set. Further, as the processing related to the opening and closing of the electric accessory 63, a processing during the opening of the general electric power and a processing during the closing of the general electric power are set.

In such a processing configuration, the Fuzu Fuden counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed, and is stored in the Fuzu Fuden address table. Is set to the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the Fuzu Fuden counter.

Explaining the Fuzu Fuden address table with reference to FIG. 35, the Fuzu Tokuden counter can set numerical information from "0" to "4", and the Fuzu Fuden address table can be set to Fuzu Fuden. The start address information (“NSA0” to “NSA4”) is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the electric counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal map variation start process, and the start address NSA2. Is the start address of the program for executing the process during confirmation of the normal figure, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the process during the opening of the normal power, and the start address NSA4 is the closed state of the normal power. The start address of the program for executing the process.

The Fuzu Fuden counter will be used in the next processing round when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. 1 addition, 1 subtraction or "0" is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the Fuzu Fuden control process at each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the Fuzu Fuden counter.

According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special electric control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process should be executed as the normal figure normal electric control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

Below, using the Fuzu Fuden counter and the Fuzu Fuden address table, the Fuzu fluctuation start processing, the Fuzu fluctuation processing, the Fuzu confirmation processing, the Fuden opening processing, and the Fuden closing processing are performed. The processing configuration for execution will be described.

After executing the process of step 1604, the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol is executed (S1605). In the process of setting the zero flag of the normal symbol, the numerical information of the normal-figure timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read from the normal-figure fuden timer counter area 114j, and the numerical information of the normal-figure fuden timer counter is "0". In the case of "", the process of setting "1" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is executed.
In other words, if the numerical information of the normal symbol timer counter is not "0", the process of setting "0" to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (erasing "1") is performed. Execute. The normal-figure special electric timer counter is a counter used by the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the normal-figure special electric counter according to the passage of time, and is the timer in step 211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19). Numerical information is subtracted in the update process.

Next, a process of jumping (migrating) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1604 is executed (S1606). Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation start process (S1607), and when the acquired start address is NSA1, it jumps to the normal map fluctuation process (S1608). , If the acquired start address is NSA2, it jumps to the normal drawing confirmation processing (S1609), and if the acquired start address is NSA3, it jumps to the normal power opening processing (S1610) and the acquired start. If the address is NSA4, the process (S1611) during closing of the normal train is jumped.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S1607), on the condition that the hold information of the normal symbol is stored, the release determination of the electric accessory 63 is performed using the hold information of the normal symbol, and the main display unit 71 In the other display unit 71d of the above, the process of starting the variable display (blinking display) of the pattern is executed. In this case, when the information of the variable display time for fluctuating the pattern to be displayed on the other display unit 71d is set in the Fuzuden timer counter and the fluctuating display of the pattern on the other display unit 71d is started. The electric counter is updated from "0" to "1".

In the normal map fluctuation processing (S1608), other processes for updating the display on the display unit 71d are executed. In this case, on condition that the passage of the variable display time is confirmed, the information of the fixed time is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "1" to "2".

In the normal figure confirmation processing (S1609), a process for displaying the result of the opening determination this time on the other display unit 71d for the confirmation time of the normal symbol is executed, and the result of the opening determination is the winning result. The process for opening the electric accessory 63 and the process for setting the number of times of opening the electric accessory 63 when the electric accessory 63 is opened are executed with the winning result of this time as an opportunity. In this case, on condition that the passage of the fixed time of the normal symbol has been confirmed and the result of the opening judgment is the winning result, the information of the opening duration of this time in the electric accessory 63 is input to the Fuzu Fuden timer counter. At the same time, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the timer is updated from "2" to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the opening judgment is not the winning result even though the lapse of the confirmation time of the normal symbol is confirmed, the electric accessory 63 is not set to be in the open state, and the normal figure general electric counter is set to ". 0 ”The processing to clear is executed.

In the process during the opening of the normal electric power (S1610), the process for maintaining the open state of the electric accessory 63 and closing the electric accessory 63 when the closing timing is reached is executed. In this case, on condition that the elapse of the opening duration of the electric accessory 63 is confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 is set in the normal electric timer counter, and the electric accessory 63 is closed. The state is set, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "3" to "4".

In the process during closing of the electric utility (S1611), when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 63 and to open the electric accessory 63 again, the process for opening the electric accessory 63. To execute. In this case, on condition that it is confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the electric accessory 63, the information on the current opening duration of the electric accessory 63 is provided. It is set in the Fuzu Fuden timer counter, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the Fuzu Fuden counter is updated from "4" to "3". On the other hand, if it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 63 again even though the lapse of the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has been confirmed, the electric accessory 63 is not set to be in the open state and is usually used. Figure The process of clearing the normal power counter to "0" is executed.

When any of the processes of steps 1607 to 1611 is executed, the present power control process is terminated.

As described above, by using the Fuzu Fuden counter, the Fuzu Fuden address table, and the Fuzu Fuden timer counter to execute the Fuzu Fuden control process, the production and electric role for the Fuzu When the main MPU 112 specifies which situation is in the flow of a series of games consisting of the opening and closing of the object 63, it is sufficient to refer to the Fuzu Fuden counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Further, when updating the Fuzu Fuden counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and "0" clearing may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. Further, since the zero flag of the normal symbol is used as in the case of the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control processing, the processing configuration can be simplified.

Next, the demo display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a demo display process.

First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1701). When the special figure special electric counter is "0", it means that the effect for the game round is not executed and the open / close execution mode is not executed.

Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence or absence of the flag that the effect for game rounds is being executed as in the conventional case, and the presence or absence of the flag is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, first It is necessary to read the information of the flag of 1 from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information, and then read the information of the other flag from the main RAM 114 and confirm the information. Then, it is necessary to specify the address to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to set the data in the register at least twice when the data is transferred to the address. On the other hand, by using the special figure special electric counter, the address can be specified once to the main RAM 114, and the data setting process to the register when the data is transferred to it can be done only once. .. Therefore, the processing can be simplified.

If it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is not "0" (S1701: NO), the process for displaying this demo is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric counter is "0" (S1701). : YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the demo display state (S1702).

The demo display state means that the symbol display device 80 has already performed the demo display (that is, the standby display), and the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114p of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. In addition, the demo display is a predetermined demo display waiting time (for example, after the confirmation time elapses after displaying the stop result of the previous game round or after the ending of the previous open / close execution mode is completed. , 0.1 sec), the image of the start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34 perform the effect accordingly. To say.

In the demo display on the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the effective line performs a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the symbol is a predetermined one. After or instead of displaying the operating image, a moving image with a manufacturer name, a model name, or a predetermined character may be displayed.

If it is determined that the demo display state is present (S1702: YES), the demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the demo display state is not present (S1702: NO), the demo display wait state is set. Whether or not it is determined (S1703). The demo display waiting state means that the measurement of the demo display waiting time has already started, and the demo display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114p of the main RAM 114. is there.

When it is determined that the demo display waiting state is not set (S1703: N0), the demo display waiting time information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the demo display waiting time information is used as the special figure special electric timer counter. (S1704). Subsequently, the demo display waiting state is set by storing the demo display waiting flag in the other various flag storage areas 114p of the main RAM 114 (S1705). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the demo display waiting state is in effect (S1703: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1706). If it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is not "0" (S1706: NO), the demo display process is terminated as it is.

When it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is "0" (S1706: YES), the demo display state is set by storing the demo display flag in the other various flag storage areas 114p of the main RAM 114 (S1707). ). In the process of step 1707, the demo display waiting flag is cleared to release the demo display waiting state. In addition, the demo display state is canceled by clearing the demo display flag when the effect for the game round is newly started. Next, the demo start command is set as the output target (S1708). After that, the process for displaying this demo is terminated.

<Execution control of production and notification>
Next, execution control of effect and notification using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in, for example, 4 msec.

In the timer interrupt processing, first, the main command storage process is executed (S1801), and the display side command storage process is executed (S1802). The main command storage process in step 1801 is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the audio side RAM 154 when a command is received from the main MPU 112, and the display side command storage process in step 1802 is the display side. When a command is received from the MPU 162, this is a process for storing the command in the command storage area 154a of the voice RAM 154. This command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Next, the main command correspondence process for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 112 is executed (S1803), and the display side command correspondence for performing the processing corresponding to the command received from the display MPU 162 is executed. The process is executed (S1804). In the display-side command correspondence process in step 1804, although specific description is omitted, various commands are transmitted from the display-side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing during the game (see FIGS. 43 and 45), and therefore received. Executes the process corresponding to the command. The main command correspondence process in step 1803 will be described in detail later.

Subsequently, the second frame button correspondence process is executed (S1805). In this second frame button correspondence process, a predetermined key (for example, up / down / left / right) of the second frame button 27 is provided on condition that the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game rotation or open / close execution mode). When the key) is operated by the player, the volume and the amount of light corresponding to the operation are set for updating. Further, if the demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game times and open / close execution mode), or if one unit of game times is processed, the variation display of the game times is stopped. The second frame button 27, provided that the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect such as the conversation effect or the character effect) is not displayed before the predetermined period (for example, before the predetermined period when the reach is displayed). When a predetermined key (for example, the center key) of is operated by the player, a stage change command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. As a result, the display side MPU 162 changes the background stage displayed on the display screen 80a in the order of "underwater stage"-> "beach stage"-> "city stage"-> "underwater stage" and displays it. Further, when a predetermined key (for example, the center key) of the second frame button 27 is operated by the player during the period in which the advance notice effect in the case where one unit of the game times is processed is displayed, The warning response effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. As a result, on the display side MPU 162, the response effect corresponding to the notice effect is displayed on the display screen 80a, and a new character pattern, moving image, or the like is displayed. Whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from the second frame button detection sensor 27a that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

Next, the game ball passage detection determination process is executed (S1806). Here, the game ball passage detection determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a game ball passage detection determination process.

In the game ball passage detection determination process, first, based on the detection result of the game ball passage detection sensor 206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the third guide passage 205 (S1901). Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the third guide passage 205 (S1901: YES), it is determined whether or not the hold ball presence flag is stored in the hold ball presence flag storage area 154c of the voice side RAM 154. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the holding ball is held by the holding device 210 (S1902). The hold ball presence flag is stored in the hold ball presence flag storage area when the hold ball presence command is received in the main command corresponding process described later (FIG. 40, S2112).

When it is determined that the holding ball is held in the holding device 210 (S1902: YES), the value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter stored in the holding device operation notification period timer counter area 154d of the voice side RAM 154 is set. It is acquired and it is determined whether or not the value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter is 0 (S1903). The holding device operation notification period timer counter is set when the holding device operation notification command is transmitted in the setting process of the holding device operation notification period in step 1907, which will be described later.

Then, when it is determined that the value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter is 0 (S1903: YES), the holding device operation notification command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S1904). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the hold device operation notification command will be described in detail later, but briefly, the display side MPU 162 has the characters "holding device chance !?" on the symbol display device 80 and the first A symbol indicating the 1-frame button 26 (hereinafter, simply referred to as a holding device operation notification) should be displayed (see FIG. 48), and the player should operate the 1st frame button 26 to eject the holding ball of the holding device 210. Announce that it may be the timing.

Next, the light emission data reading process when the holding device operation notification is displayed on the symbol display device 80 is executed (S1905), and the voice data reading process is executed (S1906). As a result, in the light emission control process (S1807) and the voice control process (S1808) described later in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37), the light emission control and the voice control are executed according to the hold device operation notification.

After that, the holding device operation notification period is set in the timer counter (S1907). As a result, in step 1903, when the holding device operation notification is displayed on the symbol display device 80 and the light emission control and the voice control corresponding to the holding device operation notification are executed, a negative determination is made. .. That is, in the present embodiment, when the game ball continuously passes through the third guide passage 205, the holding device operation notification is not continuously executed, and the player does not feel that the holding device operation notification is bothersome. I am trying to do it. The holding device operation notification period is a period during which the holding device operation notification is displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter is a timer update process described later. It is executed in (S1809).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the holding ball is not held in the holding device 210 (S1902: NO), the holding ball is not discharged from the holding device 210 even if the player operates the first frame button 26 (FIG. FIG. 21, S402: NO), even if the game ball passes through the third guide passage 205, the game ball passage detection determination process is terminated without transmitting the holding device operation notification command. Further, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the third guide passage 205 (S1901: NO), and when it is determined that the value of the holding device operation notification period timing timer counter is not 0 (S1903: NO). , The game ball passage detection determination process is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37), after completing the game ball passage detection determination process in step 1806, the light emission control process for controlling the light emission of various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 is executed. (S1807), the voice control process for performing the voice control of the speaker unit 34 is executed (S1808). The light emission control process and the voice control process are the second frame button correspondence process in step 1805, the game ball passage detection determination process in step 1806, the main command correspondence process (FIG. 40) described later, or the display side command correspondence process. If information is set for updating, it is executed based on the information. Subsequently, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the audio side RAM 154 is executed (S1809).

Next, the main command correspondence process in step 1803 in the timer interrupt process of the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing main command correspondence processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a change command and a type command are received from the main MPU 112 (S2001), and if it is determined that these commands are received (S2001: YES), the game result is stored. Is executed (S2002). Specifically, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game round is specified from the variation command, the presence or absence of reach occurs from the variation display time, and the normal reach when reach occurs. Alternatively, it is specified which is the super reach, and the process of writing the specified information to the retained data area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed. In addition, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of this game round, that is, the game of this game round. Information on whether or not the result is a winning result, and if it is a winning result (winning in the winning or losing lottery), is specified, and the specified information is stored in the retained data area provided in the audio side RAM 154. The process of writing to 154b is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154b is data that is temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the open / close execution mode, and the notification, and after these effects and notifications are started. Is also an area for storing and holding data to be independently used by the voice MPU 152.

Next, the advance notice lottery process is executed (S2003). In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 80 in this game round. As this notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 80 starts the variable display of the symbol, or a part of the notice display. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the previous mode. It also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the winning results than in the game times corresponding to the missed results, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

Next, the stop symbol determination process is executed (S2004). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is a 16R probability variation hit result and a 4R probability variation hit result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed. It will be decided as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Subsequently, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed (S2005). In this process, the variation display time information of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, the variation display time information, the game result information specified in the above step 2002, and the game result information. An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery process in step 2003 is selected.

Next, a process of writing the type of the stop symbol determined in step 2004 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 2005 to the holding data area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S2006). Since the effect pattern includes information on the variable display time of the game times this time, by writing the information on the effect pattern in the holding data area 154b, not only the information on the effect pattern but also the information on the variable display time can be obtained. However, the voice side MPU 152 can be read again. In addition, the voice side MPU 152 can again grasp whether or not the current game round is a winning result from the type of the stop symbol.

Subsequently, the stop result command corresponding to the processing result of the step 2004 and the pattern command corresponding to the processing result of the step 2005 are transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2007). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of this command will be described later.

Next, the update process of the number of games is executed (S2008). In this update process, a process for updating the game count counter is executed so that the number of digested games measured by the game counters provided in various counter areas 154f of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of digested games is the number of games that have been digested after the end of the open / close execution mode without shifting to the open / close execution mode again. In the voice side MPU 152, the information on the number of digested games can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of digested games is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is easy to select a predetermined notice display in the notice lottery process. Execute the processing that becomes.

If it is determined that the change command and type command have not been received (S2001: NO), or after the game count update process has been executed, it is determined whether or not the fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received. (S2009). Then, when it is determined that the confirmation stop command has been received (S2009: YES), the symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2010). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to make the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round stand by on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S2009: NO), or after the process of transmitting the symbol stop command is executed, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2011). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2011: YES), the update process for the number of hits is executed (S2012). In the update process, a process for updating the hit count counter is executed so that the number of hits measured by the hit count counters provided in various counter areas 154f of the voice side RAM 154 is added by 1. The number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called continuous hits) that occur after shifting to the high-frequency support mode without shifting to the low-frequency support mode. In the audio side MPU 152, the information on the number of hits can be used when determining the content of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is a predetermined number or more, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image in the open / close execution mode can be produced. To be executed.

Next, the opening correspondence process is executed (S2013). In the opening correspondence process, the type of the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect content in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the hit result is determined. Execute the processing for. For example, the hit result that triggered the transition of the open / close execution mode this time is the 16R probability variation hit result, and in the game round immediately before that, the symbol display device 80 does not use the same odd-numbered symbol combination, but the same even-numbered symbol. When the final stop display of the combination is displayed, an effect including a content for making the player recognize that it is a 16R probability variation hit result is determined as an effect during the opening / closing execution mode this time. That is, in the production of the game times, the hit result with the low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent hit production, the hit promotion effect indicating that the hit is the hit with the high game value is determined as the effect in the open / close execution mode. To do.

As already explained here, in the holding data area 154b of the audio side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the stop symbol of the game times in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game times. , When the open / close execution mode is entered following the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the retained data area 154b are cleared when the open / close execution mode ends. .. Therefore, even if the opening command does not include the information of the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the open / close execution mode as described above. ..

Further, in the opening corresponding process of step 2013, the number of hits after the update in step 2012 is specified, and the effect according to the specified number of hits is set as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode this time.

Next, the opening command corresponding to the processing result of the above step 2013 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2014). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2011: NO), or after the process of transmitting the opening command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2015). When it is determined that the release command has been received (S2015: YES), the display side MPU 162 is notified that the variable winning device 56 has been newly started to be released, that is, one round game has been newly started. A release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 for recognition (S2016). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the release command will be described later.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2015: NO), or after the process of transmitting the release command is executed, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S2017). When it is determined that the closing command has been received (S2017: YES), the display is displayed so that the display side MPU 162 recognizes that the variable winning device 56 has been closed, that is, the round game of 1 has been completed. A closure command is sent to the side MPU 162 (S2018). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2017: NO), or after the process of transmitting the closing command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received, as shown in FIG. (S2101). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2101: YES), the ending correspondence process is executed (S2102). In the ending correspondence process, the content of the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the processing for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the winning / losing lottery mode is executed. To do. In the present embodiment, since the high-probability mode is always set after the opening / closing execution mode, the effect including the content for making the player recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the ending effect of this time.

Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 2102 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2103). The processing content of the display side MPU 162 due to the reception of the command will be described later.

When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2101: NO), or after the process of transmitting the ending command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S2104). When it is determined that the notification command is being received (S2104: YES), it means that an event to be notified such as some abnormality or a state change of the pachinko machine 10 has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. In order to perform the notification, the light emission data is read out from the various data table storage areas 153a (S2105), and the audio data is read out (S2106). As a result, in the light emission control process (S1807) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that light emission is performed according to the light emission data, and the voice control of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37) is performed. In the process (S1808), the voice control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so that the sound is output according to the voice data. After that, the notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2107). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so that the notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2104: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2108). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. Therefore, when it is determined that the release command has been received (S2108: YES), it means that the event to be notified such as the abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10 has been canceled. In order to cancel the notification, the release setting process is executed (S2109). After that, the release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2110). When the display-side MPU 162 receives the command, the display-side MPU 162 displays and controls the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

If it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2108: NO), or after the release command has been transmitted, it is determined whether or not either the hold ball command or the hold ball no command has been received (S2111). ). When it is determined that either the hold ball presence command or the hold ball no command is received (S211: YES), the hold ball presence flag correspondence process is executed (S2112). In this hold ball presence flag correspondence process, when the hold ball presence command is received, the hold ball presence flag is stored in the hold ball presence flag storage area 154c of the voice side RAM 154 (the hold ball presence flag is already stored). If so, keep it as it is). When the hold ball no command is received, the hold ball presence flag stored in the hold ball presence flag storage area 154c of the voice side RAM 154 is deleted (if the hold ball presence flag is not stored, it is as it is. maintain). As a result, in step 1902 of the game ball detection process (FIG. 38), it is determined whether or not the holding ball is held by the holding device 210.

When it is determined that neither the hold ball presence command nor the hold ball non-command is received (S211: NO), or after the hold ball flag correspondence process is executed, the hold device movable command correspondence process is executed (S2113). .. Here, the process corresponding to the movable command of the holding device will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to the holding device movable command.

In the holding device movable command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the holding device movable command is received (S2201). Then, when it is determined that the holding device movable command has been received (S2201: YES), the value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter stored in the holding device operation notification period timer counter area 154d of the voice side RAM 154 is acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter is 0 (S2202).
That is, it is determined whether or not the holding ball has been ejected from the holding device 210 when the symbol display device 80 is notified of the holding device operation and the light emission control and the voice control corresponding to the holding device operation notification are being performed. To do.

Then, when it is determined that the value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter is not 0 (S2202: NO), the first light emission data is read from the various data table storage areas 153a (S2203), and the first The voice data reading process is executed (S2204). In the present embodiment, the voice side MPU 152 reads data for notifying that the holding ball has been ejected from the holding device 210 during the holding device operation notification as the first light emitting data and the first voice data. As a result, in the light emission control process (S1807) and the voice control process (S1808) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37), light emission is notified to the player that the hold ball has been discharged from the hold device 210 during the notification of the hold device operation. Perform control and voice control. After that, the first holding device movable command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2205).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the holding device operation notification period timer counter is 0 (S2202: YES), the second light emission data is read from the various data table storage areas 153a (S2206), and the second light emission data is read. 2 The voice data reading process is executed (S2207). In the present embodiment, the voice side MPU 152 reads, as the second light emitting data and the second voice data, data for notifying that the holding ball has been discharged from the holding device 210 when the holding device operation notification is not in progress. As a result, in the light emission control process (S1807) and the voice control process (S1808) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37), the player is notified that the hold ball has been ejected from the hold device 210 when the hold device operation is not being notified. Execute light emission control and voice control. After that, the second holding device movable command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2208).

The processing of the display side MPU 162 by receiving the first holding device movable command will be described later, but briefly, the display side MPU 162 has the characters "Watch over the holding ball !!" on the symbol display device 80. (Hereinafter referred to as a notification that the holding device has been properly operated) is displayed (see FIG. 52). Similarly, the processing of the display side MPU 162 by receiving the second holding device movable command will be described later, but briefly, the display side MPU 162 displays "holding device chance !?" on the symbol display device 80. The characters "Please operate from !!" (hereinafter referred to as "notification of improper operation of holding device") are displayed (see FIG. 53).

After transmitting the first holding device movable command or the second holding device movable command, the timer counter for the number of invalid times of the first frame button is cleared to 0 (S2209). That is, when the holding ball is discharged from the holding device 210, in other words, when the player's operation on the first frame button 26 is valid, the timer counter for the number of times the first frame button is invalid is cleared to 0. As a result, in the process corresponding to the first frame button invalidation command in step 2114 described later, the number of times that the player's operation on the first frame button 26 is continuously invalidated is counted.

Returning to the description of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 40), after executing the holding device movable command correspondence process in step 2113, the first frame button invalid command correspondence process is executed (S2114). Here, the process corresponding to the first frame button invalid command will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a process corresponding to the first frame button invalid command.

In the process corresponding to the first frame button invalid command, first, it is determined whether or not the first frame button invalid command is received (S2301). Then, when it is determined that the first frame button invalid command has been received (S2301: YES), the first frame button invalid count counter stored in the first frame button invalid count counter area 154e of the voice side RAM 154. Is acquired, and a process of adding 1 to the acquired value is executed (S2302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the first frame button invalidity counter added by 1 in step 2302 and the specified number of times stored in the various data table storage areas 153a of the audio side ROM 153 match (S2303). .. Then, when it is determined that the value of the first frame button invalidation counter and the specified number of times match (S2303: YES), a hold ball no command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2304), and the first frame Clear the button invalidation counter to 0 (S2305). After that, the light emission data is read out from the various data table storage areas 153a (S2306), the voice data is read out (S2307), and the process corresponding to the first frame button invalid command is completed. In the present embodiment, in the light emission data reading process and the voice data reading process, the holding device 210 notifies that the operation on the first frame button 26 is invalid because the holding ball is not held. Read the data of. As a result, in the light emission control process (S1807) and the voice control process (S1808) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37), the light emission control and the voice control for notifying that the operation for the first frame button 26 is invalid are executed. Will be done.

The processing caused by the display side MPU 162 receiving the hold ball no command will be described later, but briefly, the display side MPU 162 causes the symbol display device 80 to "store the hold ball in the hold device !!". (Hereinafter, referred to as a holding device holding ball unannounced) is displayed (see FIG. 54).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first frame button invalid command has not been received (S2301: NO), or the first frame button invalid number and the specified number do not match, that is, the first frame button invalid number is the specified number. If it is determined that the value is less than (S2303: NO), the process corresponding to the first frame button invalid command is terminated as it is.

Returning to the explanation of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 40), after executing the first frame button invalid command correspondence process in step 2114, after executing other correspondence processing (S2115), the main command correspondence process is terminated. To do. In other corresponding processing, for example, when the hold command is received, the hold command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162, and when the shift time command is received, the shift time command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. .. As a result, in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Dt, Ds and the execution reserved symbol display area Du in the symbol display device 80, the reserved area in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 is stored. A predetermined reserved symbol is displayed in the corresponding display area. Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162. As a result, the demo display is started on the symbol display device 80.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 162 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the display side MPU 162, and the V interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When the VDP165 of the display control device 93 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 80, the VDP165 starts to output the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the front view of the display screen 80a, and the dot The image signal is sequentially output to the dots lined up on the horizontal line including one end, and the image signal is output to the dots from left to right in order from the top for each horizontal line, and the front view right of the display screen 80a. Finally, the image signal is output for the dots in the lower corner. In this case, the VDP 165 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display side MPU 162 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display side MPU 162 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal.

However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started. Further, as described above, when data is not set in each unit area RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the reserved symbol display area 167a (data meaning a blank is set), the reserved symbol is displayed. No image is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds, Dt, and Du of the display screen 80a corresponding to the unit areas RE1 to RE4, RF1 to RF4, and RG of the use area 167a, or on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. The background image is displayed.

In the V interrupt process, first, the content of the command stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 is analyzed (S2401). In the command storage area 164a, commands are sequentially stored by a command storage process that is activated when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 92. This command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are used. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed well.

Subsequently, based on the analysis result of step 2401, it is determined whether or not a new command is being received (S2402), and if it is determined that a new command is being received (S2402: YES), command correspondence processing is performed. Execute (S2403).

Here, the command correspondence process of step 2403 in the V interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the command correspondence process.

In the command correspondence process, first, it is determined whether or not the stop result command and the pattern command are received (S2501). When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have been received (S2501: YES), the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the stop result command and the pattern command is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. After executing the data table setting process for the pattern to be written to the work RAM 164 (S2502), the process corresponding to this command is terminated.

The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the effect for the game round is displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the production for this game round is defined.

Here, the pattern data table will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 45. Note that FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pattern data table that develops into super reach.

As shown in FIG. 45, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game times is set in the pattern data table, and the content of the task is corresponding to each pointer information. Information, information on the presence / absence of command output, and information on additional data are set.

The task content information is information that is set to display the video corresponding to this game time, and unless information that does not reflect the task content information at all is set as additional data, each An image corresponding to the task content information is displayed in the frame.
In the information of the content of the task, information of parameters necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display an image for one frame at the corresponding update timing is set.

Regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 45, specifically, the pointer information of "0" is set with the data at the start of fluctuation, and the pointer information of "200" is a notice effect (for example, a conversation effect or a character effect). ) The data at the start is set, the pointer information of "300" is set with the data at the end of the advance notice effect, and the pointer information of "400" is set with the data at the start of normal reach, "700". The pointer information of "1000" is set with the data at the start of super reach, and the pointer information of "1000" is set with the data at the end of fluctuation. Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling the moving image display between the break timings is set.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 and the type of the command. In this way, by outputting a command from the display side MPU 162 to the audio side MPU 152 at a predetermined timing according to the content of the moving image, various light emitting units including the illumination unit 33 produce light according to the content of the image. At the same time, the speaker unit 34 can execute the effect of audio output according to the content of the image.

Specifically, regarding the pattern data table shown in FIG. 45, command data is set for the pointer information of "0" in which the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the game times, the light emission control, the voice control, and the like are started in the voice side MPU 152 based on the command transmission from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 (FIGS. 37, S1807, S1808). In addition, in the content of the task, the number of frames for advance transmission is larger than each pointer information in which the data at the start of the advance notice effect, the data at the start of normal reach, the data at the start of super reach, and the data at the end of fluctuation are set. Command data is set for the pointer information of the timing (number of pointers) minutes ago, specifically, the pointer information of "198", "398", "698", and "998". Therefore, for the delimiter timing other than the start of the fluctuation of the game times, the command is transmitted from the display side MPU 162 to the voice side MPU 152 in advance, and the display contents of the display screen 80a and the light emission control and the voice control are performed at these delimiter timings. It is possible to completely synchronize with the contents.

The information of the additional data is set as blank as the initial setting of the data table for the pattern, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when the notification command is received or the holding device operation notification command is received. To. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content.

Returning to the explanation of the command correspondence process (FIG. 44), if it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command have not been received (S2501: NO), it is determined whether or not the fixed stop command has been received (S2503). ). If it is determined that the fixed stop command has been received (S2503: YES), the fixed stop setting process is executed (S2504), and then the command corresponding process is terminated. In the setting process for fixed stop, the data table for statically displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the current game round until the period during the fixed stop display elapses is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to.

When it is determined that the confirmation stop command has not been received (S2503: NO), it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S2505). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2505: YES), the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2506). Terminate command handling processing.

The opening data table is used to display an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information that defines the processing required for.
The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

In the data table for the opening, the contents of the effect are defined during each round game and during the interval period between the round games from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until the end of the corresponding round game, and similarly, the data during the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set to retain the image of the loop or the last update timing until. Then, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the reception of the open command or the close command.

If it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2505: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the open command and the close command has been received (S2507). If it is determined that any of the commands has been received (S2507: YES), the processing corresponding to this command ends after the setting processing at the time of opening / closing is executed (S2508). In the setting process at the time of opening and closing, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the content of the received command.

When it is determined that the open command and the close command have not been received (S2507: NO), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S2509). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2509: YES), the setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 is executed (S2510). Terminate command handling processing.

The ending data table is necessary to display one frame of images at each update timing of the images when displaying the moving image corresponding to the current ending effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. It is a group of information in which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2509: NO), another corresponding process (S2511) is executed, and then this command corresponding process is terminated.

Next, another corresponding process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another corresponding process.

In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification command is received (S2601). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2601: YES), the notification data setting process is executed (S2602), and then the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In the notification data setting process, the notification data corresponding to the content of the notification included in the current notification command is written to the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table.
As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of the notification target event is added to the effect image for the game round and the effect image for the open / close execution mode.

When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2601: NO), it is determined whether or not the release command has been received (S2603). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2603: YES), the processing for clearing the notification data is executed (S2604), and then the corresponding processing for each item is terminated. In the notification data clearing process, among the notification data currently set in the additional data in the data table, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type to be released is canceled.

When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2603: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold device operation notification command has been received (S2605), and it is determined that the hold device operation notification command has been received. If this is done (S2605: YES), the holding device operation notification command data setting process is executed (S2606). In this holding device operation notification command data setting process, data for displaying the holding device operation notification is written to the player as additional data (see FIG. 45) of the currently set data table. As a result, the holding device operation notification is started after the next image update timing. In the present embodiment, as described above, the characters "holding device chance !?" and the symbol indicating the first frame button 26 are displayed as the holding device operation notification (see FIG. 48).

When it is determined that the holding device operation notification command has not been received (S2605: NO), it is determined whether or not the first holding device movable command has been received (S2607). The first holding device movable command is transmitted from the voice side MPU 152 when the holding device operation notification period timer counter is not 0, as described in the holding device movable command correspondence process (FIG. 41) executed by the voice side MPU 152. Command. That is, it is a command received when the holding device operation notification is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

Then, when it is determined that the first holding device movable command has been received (S2607: YES), the setting process of the first holding device movable data is executed (S2608). In this first holding device movable data setting process, after executing the process of clearing the data for displaying the holding device operation notification set in the additional data of the data table, the player holds the data at an appropriate timing. Data for displaying that the reserved ball has been ejected from the device 210 is newly written in the additional data. As a result, after the next image update timing, a notification that the holding device has been properly operated is displayed, indicating that the holding ball has been discharged from the holding device 210 at an appropriate timing. In the present embodiment, as described above, the characters "Watch over the holding ball !!" are displayed as the notification that the holding device has been properly operated (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first holding device movable command has not been received (S2607: NO), it is determined whether or not the second holding device movable command has been received (S2609). The second holding device movable command is transmitted from the voice side MPU 152 when the holding device operation notification period timer counter is 0, as described in the holding device movable command correspondence process (FIG. 41) executed by the voice side MPU 152. The command to be executed. That is, it is a command received when the holding device operation notification is not displayed on the symbol display device 80.

Then, when it is determined that the second holding device movable command has been received (S2609: YES), the setting process of the second holding device movable data is executed (S2610). In this second holding device movable data setting process, data for displaying to the player that the holding ball has been discharged from the holding device 210 when the timing is not appropriate is newly written in the additional data. As a result, after the next image update timing, a notification of improper operation of the holding device indicating that the holding ball has been ejected from the holding device 210 when the timing is not appropriate is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the characters "Please operate after the holding device chance !?" is displayed as the notification that the holding device has been improperly operated (see FIG. 53).

When it is determined that the second holding device movable command has not been received (S2609: NO), it is determined whether or not the holding ball no command has been received (S2611). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball no command is received (S2611: YES), the hold ball no data setting process is executed (S2612), and the corresponding processing for each is terminated. In this setting process of holding ball-free data, data for displaying to the player that the holding ball is not held in the holding device 210 is newly written in the additional data. As a result, after the next image update timing, the holding device holding ball no notification indicating that the holding ball is not held is displayed on the holding device 210. In the present embodiment, the characters "Please store the holding ball in the holding device !!" are displayed as the holding device holding ball unannounced (see FIG. 54).

If it is determined that the hold ball no command has not been received (S2611: NO), the other corresponding processing is executed (S2613), and then the corresponding processing is terminated.

In other corresponding processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received, and when it is determined that a hold command is being received, the display of the hold information on the symbol display device 80 corresponds to an increase in the number of holds. The process of writing the information to be changed to the work RAM 164 is executed. Since the hold command includes hold information for winning a prize at any of the starting ports 54 and 55, the display of the number of holds on the winning side is increased on the display screen 80a. Further, when it is determined that the advance notice response effect command is received, the response effect data corresponding to the advance notice effect (conversation effect or character effect) is written. As a result, after the next image update timing, the response effect to the advance notice effect is started.

Further, it is determined whether or not the shift command is received, and if it is determined that the shift command is received, the shift setting process is performed. In the shift setting process, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information set in the unit areas RE1 to RE4 and RF1 to RF4 of the reserved symbol display area 167a to the lower area side or the execution unit area RG is transmitted to the work RAM 164. Write. Specifically, since the shift command includes information on which reserved symbol information is to be shifted, when shifting the reserved symbol information in the first reserved symbol display area RE, the first Unit area RE1 → Execution unit area RG is written with information to shift the reserved symbol information, 2nd unit area RE2 → 1st unit area RE1, 3rd unit area RE3 → 2nd unit area RE2, 4th unit area RE4 → Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area, such as the third unit area RE3, is written. Similarly, when shifting the second reserved symbol display area RF, the information for shifting the reserved symbol information is written in the first unit area RF1 → the execution unit area RG, and the second unit area RF2 → the first unit area RF1. , 3rd unit area RF3 → 2nd unit area RF2, 4th unit area RF4 → 3rd unit area RF3, etc. Specifically, information for shifting the reserved symbol information in each unit area is written. As a result, the reserved symbols in the lower display area Dn are shifted one by one to the reserved symbol display area having a smaller number.

Further, it is determined whether or not the demo start command is received, and if the demo start command is received, the data table for displaying the demo is read from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163, and the work RAM 164 Executes the process of writing to. Further, it is determined whether or not the stage change command is received, and if the stage change command is received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is obtained from the data table storage area 163b of the program ROM 163. The process of reading and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. As a result, for example, when the variable display of the game times is not displayed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 43), when it is determined that there is no new command (S2402: NO), or when the command corresponding process in step 2403 is executed, the pointer update process is executed (S2404). In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This makes it possible for the display side MPU 162 to grasp the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time.

Next, the task process is executed (S2405). Here, the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a task process executed by the display side MPU 162.

In the task processing, first, it is determined whether or not additional data exists in the area corresponding to the information of the pointer this time in the data table (S2701), and when it is determined that the additional data does not exist (S2701). : NO), the task data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2702). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data (S2703). ), End this task processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the data table that additional data exists in the area corresponding to the pointer information this time (S2701: YES), whether or not the additional data is additional data to the image of the task data. Is determined (S2704). When it is determined that the data is additional data (S2704: YES), the task data and additional data of the pointer this time are read from the data table (S2705). Then, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read task data and the additional data, after performing the calculation of the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 (S2706). , End this task processing. Examples of the case where the processes of step 2705 and step 2706 are executed include the case where a character image of the notification is added.

When it is determined that the additional data is not the additional data (S2704: NO), the additional data of the pointer this time is read from the data table (S2707). Then, after executing the parameter derivation process for calculating the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 165 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time based on the read additional data ( S2708), this task processing is terminated. When the processes of step 2707 and step 2708 are executed, the holding device operation notification is displayed (FIGS. 46, S2606, 48), and the holding device appropriate operation completed notification is displayed (FIGS. 46, S2608). 52), when displaying the notification that the holding device has been improperly operated (FIG. 46, S2610, FIG. 53), and when displaying the notification that the holding device has not been held (FIG. 46, S2612, FIG. 54), the response to the advance notice effect. For example, when displaying an effect.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 43), after executing the task process of step 2405, whether or not the command data exists in the area of the data table where there is no command output corresponding to the information of the pointer this time. It is determined whether or not it is the command output timing by determining (S2406, see FIG. 45). If the command data exists, it is determined that it is the command output timing (S2406: YES), and the command setting process is executed (S2407). In this command setting process, a command is transmitted based on the timing (pointer information) determined to be the command output timing. Specifically, a command indicating that the production of the game times should be started, a command indicating that the advance notice production should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, A command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, a command indicating that the effect of the open / close execution mode should be started, a command indicating that the effect of the round game should be started, and a command indicating that the effect of the interval between the round games should be started. A command indicating, a command indicating that the ending effect should be started, a command indicating that the demo display should be started, and the like are transmitted to the audio side MPU 152 according to the respective timings.

In this case, a command indicating that the advance notice effect should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode effect should be started, and a round. The command indicating that the production of the game should be started, the command indicating that the production of the interval between round games should be started, and the command indicating that the production of the ending should be started have the contents of the type of the production. include.

In addition, a command indicating that the advance notice production should be started, a command indicating that the normal reach should be started, a command indicating that the super reach should be started, a command indicating that the fluctuation should be ended, and a round game production are performed. The command indicating that the command should be started includes information indicating how many frames after the output timing of the command the target production should be started. As a result, even if these commands are transmitted at a timing prior to the start timing of the target effect for each command, the voice MPU 152 synchronizes with the start of the target effect on the symbol display device 80 and transmits electricity. It is possible to start the target effect on the light emitting unit including the decoration unit 33 and the speaker unit 34.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the voice side MPU 152 exists on the upstream side of the communication with respect to the display side MPU 162 when the main side MPU 112 is used as a reference, but the voice side MPU 152 has a command transmitted from the display side MPU 162. Control of the production is also performed based on. Therefore, it is difficult for a gap between the light emitting effect and the sound effect executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display effect executed by the display side MPU 162 to occur, and the effect using each effect means is preferably executed. Can be done.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 43), when it is determined that the command output timing is not reached (S2406: NO), or when the command setting process of step 2407 is executed, after the drawing list output process is executed (S2408). ), Ends this V interrupt process. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to VDP165.
In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to this drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, the image of one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

The above is the control of the effect and the notification in the present embodiment. Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 when the holding device operation notification, the holding device appropriate operation completed notification, the holding device improperly operated notification, the holding device holding ball no notification occurs, and the game ball rolling surface 191. The rolling of the game ball will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a holding device operation notification displayed on the symbol display device 80, and FIGS. 49 to 51 are schematic views showing the rolling of the game ball on the game ball rolling surface 191. It should be noted that FIGS. 49 to 51 are enlarged views of the vicinity of the stage portion 190, and the rear wall portion 192, the front wall portion 199, and the like are omitted. Further, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a notification of proper operation of the holding device displayed on the symbol display device 80, and FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a notification of improper operation of the holding device displayed on the symbol display device 80. , FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a holding device holding ball unannounced displayed on the symbol display device 80.

First, when the player launches the game ball toward the upper left side of the symbol display device 80, the game ball either passes through the first opening 200 or flows down without passing through the first opening 200. Then, the game balls that have passed through the first opening 200 are held in the holding device 210 if the holding device 210 does not hold the four game balls, and the holding device 210 holds the four game balls. If so, it is guided to the second guide passage 204 and discharged from the second opening 201. As described above, in the present embodiment, no nail or windmill is arranged in the vicinity of the first opening 200, and the player shoots the game ball aiming at the first opening 200. , The game ball can be introduced into the first guide passage 203 through the first opening 200.

Then, in the process of flowing down, a part of the game ball that did not pass through the first opening 200 or the game ball discharged from the second opening 201 passed through the third opening 202 and rolled. Guided to surface 191. At this time, the game ball passage detection sensor 206 detects that the game ball has passed through the third guide passage 205, that is, the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 (FIG. 38, S1901: YES). If the holding ball is held in the holding device 210 (FIG. 38, S1902: YES) and the holding device operation notification is not displayed (FIG. 38, S1903: YES), as shown in FIG. 48. The holding device operation notification is displayed on the symbol display device 80 (FIG. 46, S2606), the light emission control corresponding to the holding device operation notification is executed on the illumination unit 33 (FIG. 37, S1807), and the speaker unit 34 A voice corresponding to the holding device operation notification is output (FIG. 37, S1808).

In the present embodiment, when the holding ball is not held by the holding device 210, the holding device operation notification is not displayed (FIG. 38, S1902: NO). Further, the game ball that has not passed through the third opening 202 is changed in the flow direction by a nail, a windmill, or the like, and a part of the game ball wins in the first starting port 54 or the general winning opening 53, and the rest is out as it is. It is discharged from 66.

Then, the game ball (main game ball) y guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 rolls the game ball rolling surface 191 in the left-right direction in the front view as shown in FIG. 49. After that, the game ball y is guided by the rear guide passage 193a formed in the first mountain portion 193 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191 or the first valley portion 195, the second valley portion 196, It is guided by any of the forward guiding passages 195a, 196a, 196b, and 197a formed in the third valley portion 197 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191.

In the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball y is guided by the rear guidance passage 193a formed in the first mountain portion 193 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191, the first starting port 54 is awarded. It is easy to win a prize in the special general winning opening 53b when the game ball y is guided to the right front guidance passage 196b formed in the second valley portion 196 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191. Then, in the normal state, the player decides that the game ball y wins a prize in the first starting port 54 (which may shift to the open / close execution mode) in which the hit / fail determination process (FIG. 25, S703) is executed. The game ball is launched while expecting that the game ball y wins the general winning opening 53, which is the most expected and then can obtain the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls.

Here, in the present embodiment, the holding device 210 is provided, and when the player operates the first frame button 26, the holding device 210 is opened when the holding ball is held in the holding device 210. (FIG. 9 (c), 21, S404), the reserved ball held in the holding device 210 is discharged, and the reserved ball passes through the holding ball guiding passage 220 to the third valley portion on the game ball rolling surface 191. It is configured so that it can be guided to the right side of the front view of 197.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), when the game ball y is likely to be discharged from the third valley portion 197, the player operates the first frame button 26 as shown in FIG. 50 (b). By discharging the reserved ball h from the holding device 210 and guiding the holding ball h to the third valley portion 197, the holding ball h collides with the game ball y as shown in FIG. 50 (c). (The mechanical energy of the reserved ball h can be applied to the game ball y).

In the present embodiment, the holding balls held in the holding device 210 are discharged one by one according to the operation of the first frame button 26 of the player (FIG. 21). Further, when the player operates the first frame button 26 while the holding device operation notification of the symbol display device 80 is displayed, the holding device has been properly operated on the symbol display device 80 as shown in FIG. A notification is displayed (FIG. 46, S2608) to notify the player that the holding ball has been ejected from the holding device 210 at an appropriate timing. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the reserved ball.

Then, when the game ball y that collides with the reserved ball h can get over the second mountain portion 194 by colliding with the reserved ball h, the second mountain portion 194 is as shown in FIG. 51 (a). It gets over the mountain part 194 and reaches the second valley part 196 as shown in FIG. 51 (b). On the other hand, the reserved ball h that has collided with the game ball y is guided by the forward guidance passage 197a formed in the third valley portion 197 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191. As described above, the reserved ball h discharged from the holding device 210 cannot get over the second mountain portion 194 even if it does not collide with the game ball y, so that the reserved ball h is always the third valley portion. It is guided by the forward guidance passage 197a formed in 197 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the game ball y is guided by the right front guidance passage 196b formed in the second valley portion 196 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191. The general winning opening 53b is won.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the player operates the first frame button 26 to discharge the holding ball h from the holding device 210 to the game ball rolling surface 191 so that the third valley portion 197 is originally formed. The game ball y discharged from the game ball y may be pushed back to the second valley portion 196 side. That is, by operating the first frame button 26 by the player himself / herself, the game ball y, which is difficult to win in the special general winning opening 53b, can be easily won in the special general winning opening 53b. In other words, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the game property of having the player guess whether or not the result of the game round is a winning result, the game ball y is given a special general prize by using the reserved ball h. It is also possible to impart a playability that makes it easier for the mouth 53b to win a prize. Therefore, the player's interest in the game machine can be improved.

Since the holding ball h discharged from the holding device 210 does not get over the second mountain portion 194, the holding ball h itself does not win the first starting port 54 or the special general winning opening 53b, and the holding ball h itself does not win. h itself does not affect the playability. Further, in FIG. 50 (c), even if the game ball y collides with the reserved ball h, if the game ball y cannot get over the second mountain portion 194, the game ball y is combined with the reserved ball h in the third valley portion 197. It is guided by the forward guidance passage 197a formed in the above and is discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the holding device operation notification is not displayed and the holding ball h is discharged from the holding device 210 by the player operating the first frame button 26, it is shown in FIG. 53. A notification that the holding device has been improperly operated is displayed (FIG. 46, S2610), and the player is notified that the holding ball has been ejected from the holding device 210 at an inappropriate timing. That is, the holding ball h is notified from the holding device 210 at a timing when the probability that the holding ball h may collide with the game ball y is low, and the player is notified that it is not the timing to operate the first frame button 26. To do. Further, when the player continuously operates the first frame button 26 in a state where the hold ball is not held in the hold device 210, the hold device hold ball no notification is displayed as shown in FIG. 54. (FIG. 46, S2612), the player is notified that the holding ball is not held by the holding device 210. That is, in the present embodiment, when the timing of operating the first frame button 26 is not appropriate, the player is notified to that effect so that the player can correctly perform the expected game. It is designed to prevent people from feeling disgusted with the game machine.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, the holding device 210 capable of holding the game ball is provided, and the player is given a new game property in which the holding ball collides with the game ball rolling on the game ball rolling surface 191. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball.

In addition, the player collides the holding ball discharged from the holding device 210 with the game ball that is likely to be discharged from the third valley 197, so that the game ball originally discharged from the third valley 197 is the first. 2 It is possible to push it back to the 196 side of the valley. That is, by operating the first frame button 26 by the player himself / herself, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball, which was difficult to win in the special general winning opening 53b, to win in the special general winning opening 53b. Then, the player can obtain a predetermined payout of the game ball by winning the game ball in the special general winning opening 53b. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, instead of simply making it easier for the reserved ball to win the special general winning opening 53b, it is easier to make the colliding game ball win the special general winning opening 53b by colliding the reserved ball with the game ball. I am trying to be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by using the reserved ball.

Further, assuming that the length from the bottom surface (the surface on the opening side of the bottom 210b) to the opening is X and the diameter of the game ball is L, the holding device 210 has a length satisfying (3L + 1 / 2L) <X <4L. Has been done. That is, when four holding balls are held in the holding device 210, more than half of the uppermost holding balls are housed in the holding device 210. Therefore, when the game ball guided from the first guidance passage 203 toward the holding device 210 collides with the uppermost holding ball, it is possible to prevent the uppermost holding ball from being ejected from the holding device 210.

Further, the second mountain portion 194, the holding device 210, and the adjusting member 221 are each shaped so that the holding ball does not pass over the second mountain portion 194 and reach the second valley portion 196. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself from winning the first starting opening 54 or the special general winning opening 53b. That is, it is possible to suppress the holding ball itself from affecting the playability.

Further, a left front guidance passage 196a and a right front guidance passage 196b are formed in the second valley portion 196, so that the game ball can easily win a prize in the special general winning opening 53b when guided to the right front guidance passage 196b. It has become. That is, even if the game ball that is likely to be discharged from the third valley 197 collides with the reserved ball and the game ball reaches the second valley 196 (see FIG. 51 (b)), the special general winning opening 53b It is designed so that it may be discharged from the part (left front guidance passage 196a) where it is difficult to win a prize. Therefore, even if the reserved ball collides with the game ball and the game ball reaches the second valley portion 196, the player should pay attention to the subsequent rolling of the game ball. Can be done.

Further, the holding balls are discharged one by one from the holding device 210. Therefore, the reserved ball to be watched by the player can be clarified, the value of one reserved ball can be increased, and the player's interest in the reserved ball can be further improved.

Further, when the holding ball is not held in the holding device 210, the holding device operation notification is not displayed on the symbol display device 80 (FIG. 38, S1902: NO). Therefore, even though the holding ball is not held in the holding device 210, the holding device operation notification is not displayed, and it is possible to prevent the holding device operation notification from becoming an annoying effect (display) for the player.

Further, when the player continuously operates the first frame button 26 in a state where the hold ball is not held in the hold device 210, the symbol display device 80 displays the hold device hold ball no notification. (Fig. 46, S2612, Fig. 54). As a result, the player can be clearly notified that the holding ball is not held by the holding device 210, and the player can solve the question that the held ball is not discharged even if the first frame button 26 is operated. Further, since the hold device hold ball unannouncement is displayed when the player continuously operates the first frame button 26 while the hold ball is not held in the hold device 210, the hold ball is displayed in the hold device 210. If a player who understands the game playability mistakenly operates the first frame button 26 once when it is not held, the holding device holding ball no notification is not displayed, and the holding device holding ball no notification is displayed. It is possible to suppress annoying production (display) for the player.

Further, when the holding ball is ejected from the holding device 210, the holding device appropriate operation completed notification (FIG. 46, S2608, FIG. 52) is displayed on the symbol display device 80, or the holding device inappropriate operation completed notification (FIG. 46). , S2610, FIG. 53) is displayed. Therefore, the player can clearly recognize that the holding ball has been ejected from the holding device 210, in other words, that the operation to the first frame button 26 is effective, and the operation to the first frame button 26 is possible. It is possible to clearly recognize whether or not the timing was appropriate, and to deepen the understanding of the expected game.

Further, the function of executing the winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by the winning of the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 and the function of controlling the opening and closing of the holding device drive unit 210c are provided. It is configured to be exhibited by a common main MPU 112. Therefore, the game machine can be made according to the actual situation.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the configuration of the holding device 210 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the holding device 210 is provided with a partition plate 210e that divides the space in the holding device 210 into a portion on the bottom 210b side and a portion on the opening 210a side. It may be. Specifically, in FIG. 55, in the partition plate 210e, one game ball is held between the bottom 210b and the partition plate 210e, and three game balls are held on the partition plate 210e. Is located in. The holding device 210 is formed with an insertion hole 210f so that the partition plate 210e can move in the plane direction of the partition plate 210e, and the game board 43 has a through hole (not shown) at a portion corresponding to the insertion hole 210f. ) Is formed, and the partition plate 210e can be accommodated in the through hole through the insertion hole 210f. Further, the movement of the partition plate 210e is controlled by the holding device driving unit 210c.

In such a holding device 210, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), one holding ball is held between the bottom 210b and the partition plate 210e, and three holding balls are held on the partition plate 210e. First, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the partition plate 210e is closed and the bottom 210b is opened. As a result, one holding ball is discharged from the holding device 210, and the remaining holding balls are held as they are on the partition plate 210e. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the bottom 210b is closed and then the partition plate 210e is opened, so that the holding ball on the partition plate 210e is shown in FIG. 55 (e). Is received by the bottom 210b after it has fallen downwards. After that, by closing the partition plate 210e, the state returns to the same state as in FIG. 55 (b).

That is, in such a holding device 210, by making the timing of opening the bottom 210b different from the timing of opening the partition plate 210e, it is possible to reliably discharge the holding balls one by one from the holding device 210.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the player continuously operates the first frame button 26 or the first frame button 26 without executing the process of step 403 of the first frame button correspondence process (FIG. 21). When the operation is continued (long-pressed), the open state of the bottom 210b may be maintained so that the reserved balls are continuously discharged. In such a configuration, the uppermost portion (fourth reserved ball from the bottom 210b side) held by the holding device 210 is located at the lowermost position (first from the bottom 210b side). Since the energy becomes large, the velocity (mechanical energy) when introduced into the game ball rolling surface 191 becomes large. Therefore, in such a configuration, even when the uppermost reserved ball is discharged from the holding device 210 as it is, the reserved ball gets over the second mountain portion 194 and reaches the second valley portion 196. It is preferable to change the shapes of the second mountain portion 194, the holding device 210, and the adjusting member 221 so as not to prevent the situation.

Then, in the first embodiment, during the game ball passage detection determination process (FIG. 38), the information stored in the holding data area 154b in step 2006 of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 39) is read out, and the symbol display device 80 It may be determined whether or not the normal reach or the super reach is being displayed, and the holding device operation notification command may be transmitted to the display side MPU 162 when the normal reach or the super reach is not displayed. According to this, since the holding device operation notification is not displayed during the normal reach or the super reach, the player can pay attention to the production of the normal reach or the super reach.

Further, in the first embodiment, the holding device operation notification may be displayed every time the game ball passes through the third opening 202, or the holding device 210 may not hold the holding ball. The holding device operation notification may be displayed.

Further, in the first embodiment, even when the holding ball is not held by the holding device 210, the bottom 210b may be moved according to the operation of the player's first frame button 26.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the holding ball is ejected from the holding device 210, the notification that the holding device has been properly operated (see FIG. 52) may be displayed.

Then, in the first embodiment, the front wall portion 199 may or may not be provided in only one or both of the first mountain portion 193 and the second mountain portion 194. Good. According to this, the game ball that did not pass through the third opening 202 collides with a nail or the like arranged in the vicinity of the stage portion 190, and the traveling direction is changed, so that the game ball rolls on the game ball rolling surface 191. It becomes easier to be guided from the front end of the ball rolling surface 191 (it becomes easier to jump).
That is, the game ball that has not passed through the third opening 202 can be guided to the game ball rolling surface 191. Therefore, the number of times the player should operate the holding device 210 increases, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the game ball passage detection sensor 206 detects a game ball that is likely to be guided to the third valley portion 197 by overcoming the second mountain portion 194 from the second valley portion 196 side. May be good. According to this, the holding device operation notification can be made for the game ball that is likely to be actually guided to the third valley portion 197, and is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 without passing through the third guide passage 205. It can also be performed on a game ball. As the game ball passage detection sensor 206 in such a configuration, for example, an imaging means for imaging the vicinity of the second mountain portion 194 is used. Then, in order to determine whether or not there is a game ball that is likely to be guided to the third valley 197 by overcoming the second mountain 194 from the second valley 196 side, the imaging result captured by the imaging means is analyzed. Is executed by.

Further, in the first embodiment, when displaying the holding device operation notification on the symbol display device 80, the illumination unit 33 does not execute the light emission control corresponding to the holding device operation notification, and the speaker unit 34 notifies the holding device operation. It is also possible not to output the sound corresponding to. On the contrary, the symbol display device 80 may not display the holding device operation notification, and may execute at least one of the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 and the voice control of the speaker unit 34. Similarly, when displaying the notification that the holding device has been properly operated, the notification that the holding device has been improperly operated, and the notification that the holding device has not been operated, the illumination unit 33 controls the light emission corresponding to these notifications. It may not be executed and the sound corresponding to these notifications may not be output from the speaker unit 34. Further, the symbol display device 80 may not display these notifications, and only at least one of the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 and the voice control of the speaker unit 34 may be executed.

Then, in the first embodiment, the third opening 202 may be formed above the second opening 201. That is, the game balls discharged from the second opening 201 after the four holding balls are held in the holding device 210 may not pass through the third opening 202.
According to this, after the four reserved balls are held in the holding device 210, the player can play the game so that the game balls pass through the third opening 202 and are guided to the game ball rolling surface 191. Fire a ball. That is, after the four reserved balls are held in the holding device 210, the player fires the game balls so as not to pass through the first opening 200. For this reason, it is possible to give the player the game property of hitting the launch of the game ball according to the situation, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the first embodiment, the second starting port 55 may be arranged below the front view of the first starting port 54. That is, in the first embodiment, in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63. Therefore, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes on the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 (so-called right-handed hitting), but in this case, the game ball hits the game ball rolling surface 191. It is difficult to be guided, and the number of times the player should operate the holding device 210 (first frame button 26) is reduced. Therefore, the second starting port 55 is arranged below the first starting port 54, and the game ball passes by the player on the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 even in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode). By firing the game ball in such a manner, the player can be made to perform the game using the holding device 210. In the case of such a configuration, the normal symbol start gate 57 is arranged so that the game ball can pass through the normal symbol start gate 57 when the game ball passes through the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80. It is preferable to adjust the installation location.

Similarly, the variable winning device 56 is arranged below the front view of the symbol display device 80 so that the player can pass the game ball on the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 even in the open / close execution mode. By firing, the player can be made to execute the game using the holding device 210 even in the open / close execution mode. When the second starting port 55 or the variable winning device 56 is provided as described above, the reserved ball discharged from the third valley portion 197 of the game ball rolling surface 191 is the second starting port 55 or the variable winning device 56. It is necessary to set the arrangement position of the second starting port 55 or the variable winning device 56 so that the device 56 does not win a prize.

Further, in the first embodiment, the holding device 210 is not provided in the center frame 81, but may be provided as a separate body from the center frame 81. For example, the holding device 210 is provided on the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80. You may be. Similarly, the first guide passage 203, the second guide passage 204, and the holding ball guide passage 220 may be provided separately from the center frame 81.

Furthermore. In the first embodiment, if the height of the second mountain portion 194, the height of the holding device 210, and the like are appropriately set so that the reserved ball does not reach the second valley portion 196 over the second mountain portion 194. The holding ball guiding passage 220 may not be provided with the adjusting member 221.

Further, in the first embodiment, the left front guidance passage 196a may not be formed in the second valley portion 196, but only the right front guidance passage 196b may be formed. That is, when the game ball is discharged from the second valley portion 196, it may be mainly guided to the right front guidance passage 196b and discharged. According to this, when the game ball is discharged from the second valley portion 196, it becomes easy for the game ball to win a prize in the special general winning opening 53b, and it becomes easy for the player to obtain a profit by operating the holding device 210. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the first frame button 26 (holding device 210).

In the first embodiment, the rear guide passage 193a is not formed in the first mountain portion 193, and the front guide passage 195a, respectively, in the first valley portion 195, the second valley portion 196, and the third valley portion 197. 196a, 196b, and 197a may not be formed. In this case, the portion of the first mountain portion 193 where the rear guidance passage 193a is formed is inclined backward as a whole, and the front guidance passages of the first valley portion 195, the second valley portion 196, and the third valley portion 197 are inclined. The portion where the 195a, 196a, 196b, and 197a are formed may be inclined forward as a whole.

Further, in the first embodiment, the holding device 210 may be opened immediately after the game ball is detected by the holding ball detection sensor 210d. That is, the game ball guided in the holding device 210 may not stay (stop) and may be discharged as a holding ball as it is. In this case, the speed of the game ball is higher than that of the hold ball that is discharged by free fall after staying in the hold device 210. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the second mountain portion 194 and the adjusting member 221 have the second mountain portion 194 and the adjusting member 221 even if the game ball guided into the holding device 210 is discharged as the holding ball as it is. The shape and the like are set so as not to get over 194. In addition, the holding ball in this specification includes the case where the game ball guided in the holding device 210 is discharged as it is without staying in the holding device 210.

However, as shown in FIG. 56, the adjusting member (adjusting means) 207 is provided in the first guide passage 203, and the game ball is held after the speed of the game ball passing through the first guide passage 203 is sufficiently attenuated. It may be guided into the device 210. That is, the difference in speed when reaching the game ball rolling surface 191 between the holding ball that is discharged after staying in the holding device 210 and the holding ball that is discharged without staying in the holding device 210 becomes small. You may do so. According to this, the degree of freedom in designing the second mountain portion 194 and the adjusting member 221 can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the game ball that is not held by the holding device 210 because the second opening 201 is not formed may be guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 as it is. For example, as shown in FIG. 57, the end portion of the second guide passage 204 opposite to the holding device 210 side is located on the left side of the first valley portion 195 of the game ball rolling surface 191 in the front view. The game ball not held by the holding device 210 may be directly guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 from the left side of the front view of the first valley portion 195. According to this, the probability that the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 is increased, and the number of times the player should operate the holding device 210 can be increased, so that the player's interest in the game can be increased. It can be further improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in front view, one of the general winning openings 53 is designated as a compensation general winning opening (third ball entry portion) 53c directly below the third valley portion 197. It may be arranged so that when a prize is generated in the compensation general winning opening 53c, a predetermined number (1 in the modified example of the present embodiment) of game balls is paid out. That is, in the first embodiment, the holding ball itself held in the holding device 210 is hard to win in the first starting opening 54 and the special general winning opening 53b. Therefore, even if the reserved ball collides with the game ball, if the game ball does not continuously win the special general winning opening 53b or the like, the game ball is prevented from passing through the first opening 200. The amount of the reserved balls held in the holding device 210 is less than the total number of game balls that may win the first starting port 54 as they are, as compared with the case of firing. Therefore, the player may be disgusted with holding the game ball in the holding device 210, and the player's interest in the game using the holding device 210 may be lowered. However, as shown in FIG. 58, the compensation general winning opening 53c is arranged at a place where the reserved balls discharged from the third valley 197 are likely to win, and the prize balls (compensation) are provided by the amount of the reserved balls used. With the configuration that can be executed, the player may obtain the game ball as compensation for discharging the reserved ball by discharging the reserved ball from the holding device 210, and thus the player's holding device 210. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games using.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, in the front view, the first opening 200 may be opened from the upper center of the front view to the upper left side of the front view of the center frame 81. According to this, it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the first opening 200, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming uncomfortable because the game ball does not pass through the first opening 200.

Further, in the first embodiment, the function of executing a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winning a prize in the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and the holding device driving unit 210c are provided. The control device may be provided with a function different from that of the control device. For example, the holding measure driving unit 210c may be controlled by the voice side MPU 152.

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, the shape of the second mountain portion 194 is changed. Others are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here. FIG. 60 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the stage portion 190.

In the present embodiment, the second mountain portion 194 is configured to have a passing prevention means 194a for preventing the second mountain portion 194 from getting over the second mountain portion 194 from the third valley portion 197 side. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the overpass prevention means 194a is composed of a side surface 194a (hereinafter, referred to as a right side surface 194a) on the third valley portion 197 side of the second mountain portion 194. Then, the right side surface 194a passes through the center of the reserved ball and intersects the virtual line parallel to the game ball rolling surface 191 of the outer peripheral surface of the reserved ball, or the game ball rolls more than the intersecting portion. It is configured to have a portion that comes into contact with a portion opposite to the surface 191. In the present embodiment, the right side surface 194a is perpendicular to the game ball rolling surface 191 and the height is higher than 1 / 2L, which is the radius of the game ball.

Next, the rolling of the game ball guided to the third valley portion 197 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a schematic view showing the rolling of the game ball. The rolling of the game ball here is the game ball guided from the second valley 196 side over the second mountain 194 to the third valley 197, and the hold ball discharged from the holding device 210. It includes both of.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the game ball y is guided to the third valley portion 197 and then rolls in the left-right direction in the front view, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the game ball y rolls. When colliding with the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194, the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194 is made perpendicular to the game ball rolling surface 191 and the height from the game ball rolling surface 191 is the game ball. Since the radius of y is higher than 1 / 2L, the game ball y cannot get over the second mountain portion 194. Therefore, after colliding with the side surface of the second mountain portion 194, the game ball y rolls the third valley portion 197 to the right in the front view, and then the forward guide passage 197a formed in the third valley portion 197. It is guided to the discharge.
That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball y does not reach the second valley portion 196 from the third valley portion 197 side over the second mountain portion 194.

In the present embodiment, the player collides the holding ball with the game ball immediately before being guided to the third valley portion 197 (before contacting the surface constituting the third valley portion 197), thereby causing the above-mentioned first. The same effect as that of one embodiment can be obtained. FIG. 62 is a schematic view showing a state in which the game ball is pushed back to the second valley portion 196 by colliding the holding ball with the game ball.

That is, as shown in FIG. 62A, when a part of the game ball y protrudes from the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194 in the front view, the holding ball h is made to collide with the game ball. In some cases, y can be pushed back to the second valley 196 side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62B, when the game ball y starts to fall from the second mountain portion 194 in the front view, the game ball y is made to collide with the holding ball h to make the game ball y the second valley portion 196. It may be possible to push it back to the side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (c), the game ball y is made to collide with the holding ball h while the game ball y is falling from the second mountain portion 194 in the front view, thereby causing the game ball y to have a second valley portion. It may be possible to push it back to the 196 side.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

That is, in the present embodiment, the second mountain portion 194 has a configuration in which the right side surface 194a cannot get over the second mountain portion 194 from the third valley portion 197 side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself from passing over the second mountain portion 194 and moving to the second valley portion 196 side, and it is possible to further prevent the reserved ball itself from affecting the game.

Further, since the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194 is configured as the passing prevention means, it is not necessary to provide a new member, and the above effect can be obtained with a simple configuration.

(Modification of the second embodiment)
A modified example of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the first mountain portion 193 may be configured such that it is impossible to get over the first mountain portion 193 from the second valley portion 196 side, similarly to the second mountain portion 194. That is, in the first mountain portion 193, the right side surface on the second valley portion 196 side may be used as a passing prevention means. Specifically, the right side surface of the first mountain portion 193 may be perpendicular to the rolling surface of the game ball 191 and the height may be higher than the radius of the game ball of 1 / 2L. According to this, the game ball pushed back to the second valley portion 196 by colliding with the reserved ball does not reach the top of the first mountain portion 193. That is, the game ball pushed back to the second valley portion 196 by colliding with the reserved ball is guided to the rear guidance passage 193a formed in the first mountain portion 193 and discharged from the game ball rolling surface 191. Absent. Therefore, between the player who executes the game using the holding device 210 and the player who does not execute the game using the holding device 210, the first starting port 54 with respect to the total number of game balls fired by the player is reached. It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the winning probability of the player, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfair feeling among the players.

Further, in the second embodiment, the overpass prevention means 194a can be changed as appropriate. For example, the right side surface 194a as a means for preventing passing is not perpendicular to the game ball rolling surface 191 and the angle formed by the right side surface 194a on the third valley portion 197 side and the game ball rolling surface 191 is an acute angle. May be. Further, the top of the second mountain portion 194 may be provided with a protruding portion (so-called eaves shape) as a means for preventing passing over, which projects toward the third valley portion 197 side.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, nails are continuously arranged above the left and right ends of the front view at the first starting port 54 from the boundary portion with the stage portion 190, and the nails are continuously arranged. It is also possible to prevent the game ball discharged diagonally downward from the 1st valley portion 195 or the 2nd valley portion 196 from winning the first starting port 54. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game ball that collides with the reserved ball from winning the first starting port 54. When the right side surface of the first mountain portion 193 is configured as a passing prevention means, the game ball that collides with the reserved ball does not roll in the first valley portion 195, so that the game ball diagonally downward from the second valley portion 196 side. A nail may be arranged only above the right end of the first starting port 54 in front view so that only the discharged game ball can be prevented from winning the first starting port 54.

Further, in the second embodiment, the configuration of FIGS. 55 to 59 described in the modified example of the first embodiment may be provided.

(Third Embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is a modification of the configuration of the stage unit 190 with respect to the first embodiment, and is the same as the first embodiment in other respects. Therefore, description thereof will be omitted here. FIG. 64A is a front view of the vicinity of the stage portion 190 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a perspective view of the vicinity of the stage portion 190.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the stage portion 190 has an upper game ball rolling surface 241 and a lower game ball rolling surface 251 arranged in the vertical direction in the front view, and each of them is smooth. It has a streamlined (curved) shape. Specifically, the upper game ball rolling surface 241 has an upper first mountain portion 242 formed on the left side of the center in front view, and both sides of the upper first mountain portion 242 are an upper first valley portion 243 and an upper second. It is said to be Tanibe 244. A rear guidance passage (a location for the first ball entry portion) 242a corresponding to the rear guidance passage 193a is formed in the upper first mountain portion 242. In the present embodiment, the upper first mountain portion 242 is formed directly above the first starting port 54.

Further, on the upper game ball rolling surface 241, an upper discharge port 245a corresponding to the upper discharge port 192a is formed at the rear end of the upper game ball rolling surface 241 as in the game ball rolling surface 191. The rear wall portion 245 is provided, and the front wall portion 246 is provided in the region forming the upper first mountain portion 242 of the front end of the upper game ball rolling surface 241.

The rear wall portion 245 extends to the rear end of the lower game ball rolling surface 251. Further, the upper discharge port 245a is formed so as to discharge the game ball guided to the rear guidance passage 242a. Therefore, when the game ball is guided to the upper game ball rolling surface 241, the game ball is guided to the rear guidance passage 242a and discharged, or the upper first valley portion 243 and the upper second valley portion 243. It is discharged from any of 244. Then, when the game ball is guided to the rear guidance passage 242a and discharged from the upper game ball rolling surface 241, the game ball is discharged from the lower discharge port 198 via the upper discharge port 245a. It is easy to win a prize in the first starting port 54.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper first valley portion 243 and the upper second valley portion 244 are not formed with the front guidance passages corresponding to the front guidance passages 195a, 196a, and 196b, respectively, and are generally forward. The shape is inclined toward it. Therefore, a part of the game ball discharged from the upper first valley portion 243 or the upper second valley portion 244 is discharged diagonally downward (with acceleration in the left-right direction in the front view) (FIG. 65). See (b)).

The lower game ball rolling surface 251 is arranged so that the length (width) in the vertical direction of the paper surface is longer than that of the upper game ball rolling surface 241 and the front end protrudes from the front end of the upper game ball rolling surface 241. ing. That is, in the lower game ball rolling surface 251, the game balls discharged from the upper first valley portion 243 or the upper second valley portion 244 on the upper game ball rolling surface 241 are guided to the lower game ball rolling surface 251. It is configured to be done. The lower game ball rolling surface 251 has the same width as the upper game ball rolling surface 241, and the lower game ball rolling surface 251 is arranged in front of the upper game ball rolling surface 241. The front end of the lower game ball rolling surface 251 may be made to protrude from the front end of the upper game ball rolling surface 241.

Further, in the lower game ball rolling surface 251, the lower first mountain portion 252 is formed on the left side of the center of the front view, and the lower second mountain portion 253 is formed on the right side of the center of the front view. The left side of the first mountain portion 252 when viewed from the front is the lower first valley portion 254, and the space between the lower first mountain portion 252 and the lower second mountain portion 253 is the lower second valley portion 255 and the lower second mountain portion 253. The right side of the front view of the portion 253 is the lower third valley portion 256. That is, on the lower game ball rolling surface 251 from the left side of the front view, the lower first valley portion 254, the lower first mountain portion 252, the lower second valley portion 255, the lower second mountain portion 253, The lower third valley portion 256 is formed in order. In the present embodiment, the lower first mountain portion 252 is formed directly below the upper first mountain portion 242. That is, the lower first mountain portion 252 is formed directly above the first starting port 54.

Further, the lower game ball rolling surface 251 is substantially perpendicular to the lower game ball rolling surface 251 in the region forming the lower first mountain portion 252 of the front end of the lower game ball rolling surface 251. A front wall portion 257 extending in a shape is provided. That is, the lower game ball rolling surface 251 is provided with a front wall portion 257 so that the game ball is not discharged from the front of the lower first mountain portion 252. In other words, the lower game ball rolling surface 251 is provided with a front wall portion 257 so that the game ball is not discharged from directly above the first starting port 54.

Then, a front guidance passage 254a corresponding to the front guidance passage 195a is formed in the lower first valley portion 254, and a front guidance corresponding to the front guidance passage 196a and 196b is formed in the lower second valley portion 255. A passage 255a and a front guidance passage (location for the second ball entry portion) 255b are formed, and a front guidance passage (location for discharging the reserved ball) 256a corresponding to the front guidance passage 197a is formed in the lower third valley portion 256. It is formed. The lower second valley portion 255 is formed with front guide passages 255a and 255b, the front guide passage 255a is formed on the left side in the front view, and the front guide passage 255b is formed on the right side in the front view. In the following, when the front guide passages 255a and 255b formed on the lower second valley portion 255 are clearly distinguished, the front guide passage 255a formed on the lower first mountain portion 252 side is referred to as the left front guide passage. It is called 255a, and the front guidance passage 255b formed on the lower second mountain portion 253 side is called the right front guidance passage 255b.

The above is the configuration of the stage unit 190. The third guide passage 205 is arranged so as to guide the game ball from the front left side of the upper first valley portion 243 of the upper game ball rolling surface 241, and the reserved ball guide passage 220 is the lower third. It is arranged so as to guide the game ball from the right side of the valley portion 256 when viewed from the front.

Further, the special general winning opening 53b is formed directly below the right front guidance passage 255b formed in the lower second valley portion 255 in the front view. Therefore, the game ball guided to the right front guidance passage 255b and discharged from the lower game ball rolling surface 251 is guided to the other front guidance passages 254a, 255a, 256a and is guided to the lower game ball rolling surface 251. It is easier to win a prize in the special general winning opening 53b than when it is discharged from.

The lower second mountain portion (passing prevention means) 253, the holding device 210, and the adjusting member 221 are held in the same manner as the relationship between the second mountain portion 194, the holding device 210, and the adjusting member 221 in the first embodiment. The installation position, material, shape, and the like are set so that the game ball discharged from the device 210 cannot get over the lower second mountain portion 253. That is, the lower second mountain portion 253, the holding device 210, and the adjusting member 221 are configured so that the holding ball discharged from the holding device 210 is always discharged from the lower third valley portion 256.

Next, a game ball that rolls on the upper game ball rolling surface 241 and the lower game ball rolling surface 251 will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIGS. 65 to 68 are schematic views showing the rolling of the game ball and the holding ball on the upper game ball rolling surface 241 and the lower game ball rolling surface 251. It should be noted that FIGS. 65 to 68 are enlarged front views of the vicinity of the stage portion 190, and the rear wall portion 245, the front wall portion 246, 257, etc. are omitted.

First, when the game ball launched by the player passes through the third opening 202, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the game ball y is guided to the upper game ball rolling surface 241 and rolls on the upper game ball. The surface 241 is rolled in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. After that, the game ball y is guided by the rear guide passage 242a formed in the upper first mountain portion 242 and discharged from the upper game ball rolling surface 241 or as shown in FIG. 65 (b). It is discharged from either the upper first valley portion 243 or the upper second valley portion 244 (FIG. 65 (b) shows the case where the discharge is performed from the upper second valley portion 244).
When the game ball y is guided to the rear guidance passage 242a and discharged from the upper game ball rolling surface 241, the game ball y is discharged from the lower discharge port 198 via the upper discharge port 245a. Therefore, it is easy to win a prize in the first starting port 54.

Then, the game ball y discharged from the upper first valley portion 243 or the upper second valley portion 244 is guided to the lower game ball rolling surface 251 located below the upper game ball rolling surface 241. At this time, since the lower first valley portion 254 and the lower second valley portion 255 are generally inclined forward, the game ball y faces diagonally downward from the upper game ball rolling surface 241. However, a part of the game ball y that is discharged and guided to the lower game ball rolling surface 251 rolls in the left-right direction in the front view. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the game ball y is likely to be discharged from the lower third valley portion 256 on the lower game ball rolling surface 251 as shown in FIG. 66 (b). The player operates the first frame button 26 to eject the holding ball h from the holding device 210, and guides the holding ball h to the lower third valley portion 256, as shown in FIG. 67 (a). The reserved ball h can be made to collide with the game ball y (the mechanical energy of the reserved ball h can be applied to the game ball y).

Then, when the game ball y that collides with the reserved ball h can get over the lower second mountain portion 253 by colliding with the reserved ball h, as shown in FIG. 67 (b). , Overcomes the lower second mountain portion 253 and reaches the lower second valley portion 255 as shown in FIG. 68 (a). On the other hand, the reserved ball h that has collided with the game ball y is guided by the front guidance passage 256a formed in the lower third valley portion 256 and discharged from the lower game ball rolling surface 251. As described above, even if the holding ball h discharged from the holding device 210 does not collide with the game ball y, the holding ball h cannot get over the lower second mountain portion 253, so that the holding ball h cannot get over the lower second mountain portion 253. h is always guided by the front guidance passage 256a formed in the lower third valley portion 256 and discharged from the lower game ball rolling surface 251.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68B, the game ball y is guided to the right front guidance passage 255b formed in the lower second valley portion 255 and discharged from the lower game ball rolling surface 251. As a result, the special general winning opening 53b is won.

As described above, the front wall portion 257 is provided at the front end of the top portion of the lower first mountain portion 252, and the game ball y is not discharged from the top portion of the lower first mountain portion 252.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, the upper game ball rolling surface 241 and the lower game ball rolling surface 251 are provided, and the lower game ball rolling surface 251 is a game ball ejected from the upper game ball rolling surface 241. The game ball that is guided and discharged from the holding device 210 is configured to be guided. Then, the game ball is ejected by being guided by the rear guidance passage 242a on the upper game ball rolling surface 241 so that the game ball can easily win a prize in the first starting port 54, and the lower game ball rolls. By being guided to the right front guidance passage 255b on the moving surface 251 and discharging the game ball, the game ball can easily win a prize in the special general winning opening 53b. That is, in the present embodiment, a path that easily wins the first starting port 54 is formed on the upper game ball rolling surface 241 and a path that easily wins the special general winning opening 53b is formed on the lower game ball rolling surface 251. Has been done. That is, the path for easily winning the first starting port 54 and the path for easily winning the special general winning opening 53b are formed on different rolling surfaces.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball that collides with the reserved ball from winning the first starting port 54, and the same effect as that of the second embodiment can be obtained. Further, the degree of freedom in designing the upper game ball rolling surface 241 and the lower game ball rolling surface 251 can be improved, and a novel shape for the player can be adopted.

Further, a left front guidance passage 255a and a right front guidance passage 255b are formed in the lower second valley portion 255, and the game ball wins a special general winning opening 53b when guided to the right front guidance passage 255b. It is easy to do. That is, even if the game ball that is likely to be discharged from the lower third valley 256 collides with the reserved ball and the game ball reaches the lower second valley 255 (see FIG. 68 (a)), it is special. It is designed so that it may be discharged from a portion (left front guidance passage 255a) where it is difficult to win a prize in the general winning opening 53b. Therefore, even if the game ball reaches the lower second valley portion 255 by colliding the reserved ball with the game ball, the player pays attention to the subsequent rolling of the game ball. Can be made to.

(Modified example of the third embodiment)
A modified example of the third embodiment will be described. For example, in the third embodiment, the left front guidance passage 255a may not be formed in the lower second valley portion 255, but only the right front guidance passage 255b may be formed. That is, when the game ball is discharged from the lower second valley portion 255, it may be mainly guided to the right front guidance passage 255b and discharged. According to this, when the game ball is discharged from the lower second valley portion 255, the game ball is easily won in the special general winning opening 53b, and the profit is obtained by the player operating the holding device 210. It will be easier. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the first frame button 26 (holding device 210).

Further, in the third embodiment, the rear guide passage 242a is not formed in the upper first mountain portion 242, and the lower first valley portion 254, the lower second valley portion 255, and the lower third valley portion 242 are not formed. The forward guide passages 254a, 255a, 255b, and 256a may not be formed in 256, respectively. In this case, the portion of the upper first mountain portion 242 where the rear guide passage 242a is formed is inclined rearward as a whole, and the lower first valley portion 254, the lower second valley portion 255, and the lower third valley portion 254. The portion of the valley portion 256 where the forward guide passages 254a, 255a, 255b, and 256a are formed may be inclined forward as a whole.

Then, in the third embodiment, the configuration of FIGS. 55 to 59 described in the modification of the first embodiment may be provided. In the third embodiment, when the configuration of FIG. 58 in the modified example of the first embodiment is provided, compensation is generally provided directly under the lower third valley portion 256 (forward guidance passage 256a) in the front view. The winning opening (third ball entry portion) 53c may be arranged. Further, in the third embodiment, the configuration of FIG. 63 described in the modification of the second embodiment may be provided.

(Fourth Embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the method of guiding the game ball to the holding device 210 is changed, and the other aspects are the same as those of the first embodiment. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted here. .. FIG. 69 is a front view of the game board 43 in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the game ball is launched (left-handed) on the front surface of the game board 43 so that the player passes the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80. The area where the game ball flows down is referred to as the first area RS, and the area where the game ball flows down by launching (striking right) the game ball so that the player passes the right side of the front view of the symbol display device 80 is referred to as the second area RT. Then, the passive distribution unit (distribution means) 260 is arranged above the second region RT. That is, since the basic configuration (control) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, the player can play the game ball in the high frequency support mode or the open / close execution mode (hit). The passive distribution unit 260 is arranged at a position where the game ball passes when hitting to the right.

Although the player can fire the game ball toward the second area RT even in the normal time, when the player fires the game ball toward the second area RT in the normal time, the game ball is a game. Since it is difficult to be guided to the ball rolling surface 191, it is disadvantageous as compared with the case where the player launches the game ball toward the first region RS. Further, in the present embodiment, the first opening 200, the second opening 201, the first guide passage 203, and the second guide passage 204 are not formed, and the player moves the game ball toward the first region RS. When fired, the game ball is not guided to the holding device 210.

Here, the configuration of the passive distribution unit 260 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the passive distribution unit 260.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the game ball reaches the passive distribution unit 260, the passive distribution unit 260 distributes the discharge destination of the game ball to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2, and passively distributes the ball. A plurality of passive distribution devices 263 having a distribution member (distribution member) 261 and a branch wall portion 262 are provided. The guide area R1 is an area where the game ball can enter the inflow port 290 leading to the holding device 210 described later, and the discharge area R2 is an area where the game ball is difficult to enter the inflow port 290. is there. In the present embodiment, the guide region R1 is the region on the upper side (outer rail 52 side) of the regions in which the passive distribution unit 260 is arranged in the second region RT, and the discharge region R2 is the second region RT. It is the area on the lower side (the symbol display device 80 side) of the area where the passive distribution unit 260 is arranged.

In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 261 has rod-shaped first to third protruding pieces 264 to 266 extending in one direction, and these first to third protruding pieces 264 to 266 are shaft portions 267. The shaft portion 267 is provided with a substantially Y-shape in front view so as to be equiangularly spaced around the center. Then, by attaching the shaft portion 267 to the game board 43, the shaft portion 267 can be rotated around the shaft portion 267. Further, in the passive distribution member 261, a first accommodating portion (first passive portion) 268 capable of receiving a game ball is formed in a portion between the first projecting piece 264 and the second protruding piece 265, and a first A second accommodating portion (second passive portion) 269 capable of receiving a game ball is configured in a portion between the one protruding piece 264 and the third protruding piece 266. Then, when the passive distribution member 261 receives the game ball at the first accommodating portion 268 or the second accommodating portion 269, the passive distribution member 261 rotates around the shaft portion 267 due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the guide region R1 or Allocate (induce) to the discharge area R2. The rotation limit position of the passive distribution member 261 is defined by the branching wall portion 262 as described later.

The branch wall portion 262 is arranged directly below the shaft portion 267 and extends in the vertical direction in the front view. Further, in detail, the branch wall portion 262 is arranged between the second protruding piece 265 and the third protruding piece 266, and when the passive distribution member 261 rotates, the second protruding piece 265 or the third protruding piece 265 or the third It is arranged so that further rotation of the passive distribution member 261 is suppressed by abutting with the projecting piece 266. That is, the branching wall portion 262 functions as a stopper that defines the rotation limit position of the passive distribution member 261. In the present embodiment, the passive distribution member 261 is arranged so that the second protruding piece 265 abuts on the branching wall portion 262 from the right side (outer rail 52 side) in front view when it rotates, and the third protruding piece The 266 is arranged so as to come into contact with the branch wall portion 262 from the left side (the design display device 80 side) in front view. That is, when the passive distribution member 261 receives the game ball by the first accommodating portion 268, it rotates clockwise (second circumferential direction) to guide the game ball to the guide region R1 and guide the game ball to the second guide region R1. When it is received by the accommodating portion 269, it is arranged so as to rotate counterclockwise (first circumferential direction) and guide the game ball to the discharge region R2.

Further, in the present embodiment, the passive distribution member side magnet 264a is provided at the tip portion of the first protruding piece 264 opposite to the shaft portion 267, and the first protruding piece 264 is behind the game board 43. When the extension direction is the vertical direction in the front view, the base side magnet 270 is provided at a position corresponding to the passive distribution member side magnet 264a. In this embodiment, the rotation regulating means is composed of the passive distribution member side magnet 264a and the base side magnet 270.

The passive distribution member side magnet 264a and the base side magnet 270 are rod-shaped, respectively, and the polarity of the base side magnet 270 side in the passive distribution member side magnet 264a and the passive distribution member side magnet 264a in the base side magnet 270. It is arranged so that the polarities on the sides repel each other (south poles or north poles).

As a result, the position where the passive distribution member side magnet 264a and the base side magnet 270 are closest to each other (the tip portions face each other) is the case where the first protruding piece 264 is located directly above the shaft portion 267. Since the passive distribution member side magnet 264a and the base side magnet 270 are arranged so as to have the same polarity (S poles or N poles), the first protruding piece 264 repels and the shaft portion 267 It is possible to suppress the stop just above. That is, the first accommodating portion 268 or the second accommodating portion 269 can be maintained in a state of being opened upward (a state of being rotated in the first circumferential direction or the second circumferential direction). Therefore, when the game ball reaches the passive distribution member 261, the game ball is alternately received by the first accommodating portion 268 or the second accommodating portion 269, and is alternately discharged to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2.

The above is the configuration of the passive distribution device 263. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, four passive distribution devices 263 are continuously provided so as to be downwardly downward in the front view in the second region RT. Specifically, when the game ball is distributed to the guide region R1 side by the passive distribution device 263 on the upstream side (front stage) in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball is passively distributed on the downstream side (rear stage). It is arranged so as to be received by either the first accommodating portion 268 or the second accommodating portion 269 of the passive distribution member 261 in the device 263.

Further, when the game ball is distributed to the guide area R1 side by the passive distribution unit 260 in the second region RT, that is, to the guide area R1 side by the passive distribution device 263 arranged on the most downstream side. An inflow port 290 is provided so that the game ball can enter when the game ball is guided.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, a fourth guide passage 280 connecting the opening 210a of the holding device 210 and the inflow port 290 is arranged behind the game board 43. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, the center frame 81 is provided with a fifth guide passage 281, and the fifth guide passage 281 is formed in the opening 210 a of the holding device 210 and the center frame 81. It is formed so as to connect with the fourth opening 282.

The fourth guide passage 280 exhibits the same function as the first guide passage 203, and has a shape inclined from the inflow port 290 toward the opening 210a side of the holding device 210. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the inflow port 290 is guided to the opening 210a of the holding device 210. Further, the fifth guide passage 281 exhibits the same function as the second guide passage 204, and has a shape inclined from the opening 210a side of the holding device 210 toward the fourth opening 282 side. There is. Therefore, when four holding balls are held in the holding device 210, the game balls guided to the opening 210a side of the holding device 210 pass through the fifth guide passage 281 to the fourth opening 282. Is discharged from. However, in the present embodiment, the fourth opening 282 is formed on the upper side of the front view from the normal symbol start gate 57 and the variable winning device 56, and the game ball (inflow port) discharged from the fourth opening 282. A game ball that has passed through 290 but has not been held by the holding device 210) is configured to be able to reach the normal symbol start gate 57 and the variable winning device 56.

Next, the distribution operation of the game ball in the passive distribution unit 260 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the distribution operation of the two passive distribution devices 263 will be described, but the same distribution operation will be performed in the case of the four passive distribution devices 263.

As described above, the passive distribution member 261 is maintained in a state in which the first accommodating portion 268 or the second accommodating portion 269 is opened upward by the passive distribution member side magnet 264a and the base side magnet 270. In FIG. 71A, the upstream passive distribution member 261 and the downstream passive distribution member 261 are shown in a state in which the first accommodating portion 268 is opened upward, respectively.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 268 of the passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side, the passive distribution member 261 rotates about the shaft portion 267. Then, by guiding the game ball to the guide region R1 side, the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 261 on the downstream side. The passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side stops with the second accommodating portion 269 opened upward after guiding the game ball to the guide region R1 side.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), when the game ball is received by the first accommodating portion 268 of the passive distribution member 261 on the downstream side, the passive distribution member 261 rotates about the shaft portion 267. Then, by guiding the game ball to the guide area R1, the game ball is guided (distributed) to the inflow port 290. As a result, the game ball is guided to the holding device 210 via the inflow port 290 and the fourth guide passage 280. After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1 side (inflow port 290), the passive distribution member 261 on the downstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 269 is opened upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (d), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side, in FIG. 71 (a), the passive distribution member 261 has the second accommodating portion 269. Since the game ball is stopped in a state of being opened upward, the game ball is received by the second accommodating portion 269, and the passive distribution member 261 is guided to the discharge region R2 side by rotating. That is, the game ball flows down without being guided by the passive distribution member 261 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side stops in a state where the first accommodating portion 268 is opened upward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (e), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side, the first accommodating portion 268 of the passive distribution member 261 is upward in FIG. 71 (d). Since it is stopped in the open state, the game ball is guided to the guide region R1 side as in FIG. 71 (a).
After guiding the game ball to the guide region R1, the passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 269 is opened upward.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 71 (f), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 261 on the downstream side, in FIG. 71 (c), the passive distribution member 261 has a second accommodating portion 269. Since the game ball is stopped in a state of being opened upward, the game ball is received by the second accommodating portion 269, and the passive distribution member 261 is guided to the discharge region R2 side by rotating. That is, the game ball flows down without being guided to the inflow port 290. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 261 on the downstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 269 is opened upward.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (g), when the game ball is guided to the passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side, the second accommodating portion 269 of the passive distribution member 261 is upward in FIG. 71 (e). Since the game is stopped in the open state, the game ball is guided to the discharge region R2 side in the same manner as in FIG. 71 (d).
That is, the game ball flows down without being guided by the passive distribution member 261 on the downstream side. After guiding the game ball to the discharge region R2 side, the passive distribution member 261 on the upstream side stops in a state where the second accommodating portion 269 is opened upward. That is, when the distribution operation of FIG. 71 (g) is executed, the state returns to the state of FIG. 71 (a).

As described above, in the passive distribution unit 260 having the two passive distribution devices 263 shown in FIG. 71, four distribution paths (two squares) are configured, and the four game balls have four game balls. One of the game balls enters the inflow port 290. That is, when the four passive distribution devices 263 shown in FIG. 70 are provided, 16 distribution paths (2 to the 4th power) are configured, and one of the 16 game balls is a game ball. Enters the inflow port 290.

The above is the configuration of this embodiment. Next, the game method of the present embodiment will be described.

First, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the player fires the game ball toward the second region RT, a part of the game ball fired by the passive distribution unit 260 is sent to the holding device 210. Be guided. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode, the player launches the game ball toward the second region RT while expecting the game ball to enter the variable winning device 56 (large winning opening 56a). , The holding ball can be held by the holding device 210 while obtaining the privilege in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the player heads toward the second region RT while expecting that the game ball enters the second start port 55 when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57. By launching the game ball, the holding device 210 can hold the holding ball while obtaining the privilege in the high frequency support mode.

On the other hand, even in the normal state, the player can guide the game ball to the holding device 210 by firing the game ball toward the second region RT. However, when the player launches the game ball toward the second region RT, the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 as compared with the case where the player launches the game ball toward the first region RS. It is difficult for the game ball to win the first starting port 54.
That is, when the player fires the game ball toward the second region RT in the normal state, the hold ball can be held by the holding device 210, but it is difficult for the game ball to win the first starting port 54. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to receive a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the open / close execution mode, which is the greatest privilege for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained), which is disadvantageous.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the holding ball is held in the holding device 210 in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode, and the game ball is launched into the first region RS in the normal state, and the game ball is the game ball. It is preferable that the pachinko machine 10 is capable of obtaining the same operation and effect as those in the first embodiment by discharging the holding ball from the holding device 210 when guided to the rolling surface 191.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, when it is advantageous for the player to launch the game ball toward the second region RT, the game ball can be held in the holding device 210 as a further privilege. That is, in the open / close execution mode or the high-frequency support mode, the game ball can be held in the holding device 210 while obtaining the privilege. Therefore, the value of the open / close execution mode and the high-frequency support mode can be increased, and the value of the act of holding the holding ball to the holding device 210 itself can be increased. Therefore, the player's interest in the game using the holding device 210 can be improved, and the player's expectation for hitting can be further improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player can hold the game ball in the holding device 210 by firing the game ball toward the second area RT, but in a normal state, the player can hold the game ball in the second area RT. Even if the game ball is fired toward, the game ball is unlikely to be guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 and the effect of the player firing the game ball toward the second region RT is low. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the motivation of the player to hold the game ball in the holding device 210 in the normal time. Therefore, in a normal time, the holding ball can be held in the holding device 210, and the motivation to execute some cheating using the holding ball can be diminished.

Further, the player can obtain the same effect as that of the first embodiment by discharging the holding ball from the holding device 210 in the normal time. That is, the player can obtain the same effect as that of the first embodiment by discharging the holding ball from the holding device 210 after the high frequency support state ends. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to continue the game even after the high frequency support state ends, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

(Modification of Fourth Embodiment)
A modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the number of passive distribution devices 263 in the passive distribution unit 260 can be changed as appropriate, and it is preferable to arrange the optimum number according to the model.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the holding device 210 is arranged on the downstream side of the passive distribution device 263 on the most downstream side, and the guide region R1 side is arranged in the passive distribution device 263. When the game ball is guided to, the game ball may be guided (held) to the holding device 210 as it is. In such a configuration, the inflow port 290 may be arranged directly below the holding device 210 (bottom 210b), and the fourth guiding passage 280 may communicate with the holding ball guiding passage 220.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, if the game ball is distributed to the guide area R1 or the discharge area R2 by the passive distribution device 263, the arrangement method of the passive distribution device 263 can be appropriately changed. For example, when a plurality of passive distribution devices 263 are provided, the plurality of passive distribution devices 263 may be arranged so as to be downward in the front view.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the variable winning device 56 may be arranged on the left side of the symbol display device 80 in the front view while maintaining the arrangement positions of the normal symbol start gate 57 and the second start port 55. Similarly, while maintaining the arrangement position of the variable winning device 56, the normal symbol start gate 57 is arranged on the left side of the front view of the symbol display device 80, and the player launches the game ball toward the first region RS. The second starting port 55 may be arranged so that the ball can be entered when the ball is hit. That is, when the player launches the game ball toward the second region RT, there may be one opportunity for the holding device 210 to hold the game ball while obtaining a privilege. In addition, the player can obtain the privilege of the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode by launching the game ball toward the first area RS, and normally launches the game ball toward the second area RT. In the case where the game ball is easily guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 by the above, the passive distribution unit 260 may be provided in the first region RS.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the first region RS is provided with the passive distribution unit 260, the first opening 200, the second opening 201, the first guide passage 203, and the second guide passage 204. A part of the game ball launched toward the one region RS may be guided to the holding device 210 through the first opening 200 and the first guide passage 203. Even with such a configuration, since only a part of the game ball launched toward the first region RS is guided to the holding device 210, in the process until the game ball is guided to the holding device 210 by the player. It can be noticed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the configurations of FIGS. 55, 56 and 58 described in the modification of the first embodiment may be provided. When the configuration shown in FIG. 56 is provided, the fourth guide passage 280 may be provided with an adjusting member (adjusting means).

(Fifth Embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment is a modification of the configuration of the stage unit 190 with respect to the second embodiment, and is the same as the second embodiment in other respects. Therefore, description thereof will be omitted here. FIG. 73 is a front view of the vicinity of the stage portion 190 in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 73, the second valley portion 196 is provided with only the front guidance passage 196a, and the front guidance passage 196b is not provided. Further, in the third valley portion 197, along with the front guide passage 197a, a front guide passage (special entry portion portion) 197b having the same configuration as the front guide passage 197a is formed. In the present embodiment, the front guidance passage 197a is provided on the second mountain portion 194 side, and the front guidance passage 197b is provided on the side opposite to the second mountain portion 194 with the front guidance passage 197b interposed therebetween. In the following, when the forward guidance passages 197a and 197b formed in the third valley portion 197 are clearly distinguished, the front guidance passage 197a is referred to as the left front guidance passage 197a, and the front guidance passage 197b is referred to as the right front guidance passage 197b. That is.
The depth and shape of the right front guidance 197b are set so that when the holding ball is discharged from the holding device 210, the holding ball is not discharged from the right front guidance passage 197b as it is.

Further, the third valley portion 197 has an inclined surface 197c as a discharge suppressing means inclined from the right front guidance passage 197b toward the left front guidance passage 197a between the left front guidance passage 197a and the right front guidance passage 197b. Have. Specifically, when there is no other game ball in the third valley portion 197, the reserved ball discharged from the holding device 210 crawls up the inclined surface 197c after colliding with the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194 (). (Rolls along the inclined surface 197c), but the inclined surface 197c has an inclination angle, length, etc. so that the reserved ball does not reach the right front guidance passage 197b after colliding with the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194. Is set. Further, when the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191, the game ball climbs up the inclined surface 197c after passing over the second mountain portion 194 and reaching the third valley portion 197 (along the inclined surface 197c). However, the inclined surface 197c is set in an inclined angle, length, etc. so that the game ball does not reach the right front guidance passage 197b. That is, the third valley portion 197 is configured so that the game ball and the reserved ball guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 are not discharged from the right front guidance passage 197b as they are.

Further, in the present embodiment, the special general winning opening (special entry portion) 53b is provided directly below the right front guidance passage 197b formed in the third valley portion 197. That is, in the present embodiment, the general winning opening 53 provided directly below the right front guidance passage 197b is referred to as a special general winning opening 53b to distinguish it from the other general winning openings 53.

In the present embodiment, the rear guide passage 193a formed in the first mountain portion 93 corresponds to the portion for the general ball entry portion. Further, on the game board 43, nails are continuously arranged from the boundary portion with the stage portion 190 above the left and right ends of the front view at the special general winning opening 53b. That is, in the present embodiment, the front guidance passage 195a formed in the first valley portion 195, the front guidance passage 196a formed in the second valley portion 196, or the left front guidance passage 197a formed in the third valley portion 197. The game ball discharged diagonally downward from the ground is difficult to win in the special general winning opening 53b.

Next, the rolling of the game ball on the game ball rolling surface 191 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. It should be noted that FIGS. 74 and 75 are enlarged front views of the vicinity of the stage portion 190, and the rear wall portion 192, the front wall portion 199, and the like are omitted.

When the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction in the front view, and the game ball is guided to the rear guidance passage 193a formed in the first mountain portion 193 to roll the game ball. It is discharged from the moving surface 191 or is discharged from either the front guide passage 195a formed in the first valley portion 195 or the front guide passage 196a formed in the second valley portion 196, or is discharged from the second mountain portion. After passing over 194 and reaching the third valley 197, it is discharged from the left front guidance passage 197a. The inclination angle and the like of the third valley portion 197 (inclined surface 197c) are set so that the game ball that has passed over the second mountain portion 194 and reached the third valley portion 197 does not reach the right front guidance passage 197b. Therefore, the game ball is not discharged from the right front guidance passage 197b.

Then, when the holding ball is ejected from the holding device 210 by the player operating the first frame button 26, the holding ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface 191 (third valley portion 197). In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the reserved ball h crawls on the inclined surface 197c after colliding with the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194 if the game ball does not exist in the third valley portion 197. However, since the inclined surface 197c is configured as described above, it rolls again to the second mountain portion 194 side as shown in FIG. 74 (b), and as shown in FIG. 74 (c). , Is discharged from the left front guidance passage 197a.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the holding ball h is discharged from the holding device 210 in a state where the game ball y exists on the inclined surface 197c of the third valley portion 197, and is shown in FIG. 75 (b). As described above, when the game ball y and the reserved ball h collide with each other in the third valley portion 197, the reserved ball h collides with the right side surface 194c of the second mountain portion 194, and the right front guidance passage 197b from the collision position. The distance to is shortened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the reserved ball h may collide with the game ball y and repel, and may crawl up to the right front guidance passage 197b. In this case, FIG. 76 (b) shows. As shown, the reserved ball h is discharged from the right front guidance passage 197b and wins a prize in the special general winning opening 53b.

According to the present embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, the reserved ball is made to collide with a game ball that is normally discharged from the third valley portion 197 and is difficult to win in the first starting port 54 or the special general winning opening 53b. Can be discharged from the right front guidance passage 197b. That is, by colliding the reserved ball with the game ball, the reserved ball can be won in the special general winning opening 53b. Then, the player can obtain a predetermined payout of the game ball by winning the game ball in the special general winning opening 53b. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the third valley portion 197 is provided with an inclined surface 197c, and the reserved ball does not win the special general winning opening 53b unless the reserved ball collides with the game ball. Therefore, the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved.

Further, the shape of the inclined surface 197c constitutes the discharge suppressing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a new member in the third valley portion 197, and the emission suppressing means can be configured with a simple configuration.

Then, in the present embodiment, the rear guidance passage 193a, which is the route for winning the first starting port 54, and the right front guidance passage 197b, which is the route for winning the special general winning opening 53b, sandwich the second mountain portion 194. Is formed on the opposite side. Therefore, in the above, by having the right side surface 194c and the inclined surface 197c of the second mountain portion 194, the game ball is suppressed from being discharged from the right front guidance passage 197b, and the right side surface 194c of the second mountain portion 194 Although the collision holding ball is prevented from being discharged from the right front guidance passage 197b, other configurations can be easily made, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

(Modified example of the fifth embodiment)
A modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. For example, in the fifth embodiment, if the reserved ball can win the special general winning opening 53b by colliding the reserved ball with the game ball, the configuration of the game ball rolling surface 191 can be changed as appropriate. .. For example, the reserved ball may be configured to win the special general winning opening 53b by colliding the game ball and the reserved ball at the portion on the first mountain portion 193 side of the second mountain portion 194, or the second The configuration may not include the mountain part 194. In the case of such a configuration, the holding ball does not win the first starting port 54, and the holding ball that does not collide with the game ball does not win the special general winning opening 53b. It is preferable to appropriately change the formation location of the winning route (right front guidance passage 197b in the above fifth embodiment) to the 54, the special general winning opening 53, and the special general winning opening 53.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the right side surface 194a of the second mountain portion 194 may not be perpendicular to the game ball rolling surface 191.

(Other embodiments)
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Then, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. Further, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied to an embodiment different from the embodiment exemplified as an application target.

(A) Other application examples (1) In each of the above embodiments, an example in which "100" is set in the time reduction counter in step 1505 of the special electric power termination process (FIG. 33) has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, it may be "50" or "120".

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above configuration. For example, the large winning opening 56a is opened once or a plurality of times in a long-time mode, and then the large winning opening 56a is opened for a short time. The configuration may include a so-called rank-up (RU) hit that is opened once or a plurality of times depending on the embodiment. Further, although the winning / failing lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the support mode may be configured to have a winning result in which the low-probability support mode remains. For example, in the case of 4R probability variation, the support mode may remain in the low frequency support mode.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. The configuration may not be included in the winning numerical information in the probability mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the type of the winning result by the distribution lottery regarding the first starting port 54 and the type of the winning result by the distribution lottery regarding the second starting port 55 may be completely the same. With such a configuration, the lottery games may be executed in the order in which they are held. In each of the above embodiments, the lottery games may be executed in the order in which they are held.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration of granting the game ball to the variable winning device 56 or the like for winning the game ball is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out the game ball, and the function of storing the virtual game medium. In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved symbols (holding notice) related to the first and second lottery games are not displayed in the lower display area Dn of the symbol display device 80, but are provided separately from the symbol display device 80. The hold symbol may be displayed on the display screen of the display device, or the hold notice may be given by setting the movable decorative member in a predetermined notice mode, or the lamp ( The hold notice may be given by turning on the predetermined light emitting unit), or the hold notice may be given by the output of the sound from the speaker unit 34, and all or a part of each of the above embodiments may be combined. It may be configured in which a hold notice is given by.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. Further, the functions of the voice lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91, and the functions of both the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 may be integrated in the main control device 91. It may be configured as a new type. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 does not control the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 controls the display control device 93 based on the command output from the main control device 91. It may be configured to control the control device 92. Further, the second frame button detection sensor 27a may be connected to the main control device 91.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the holding device 210 does not hold four holding balls, but may be configured to hold three or less holding balls, or may hold five or more holding balls. May be configured to hold.

(9) Each of the above embodiments may be combined as appropriate. For example, the fourth embodiment may be combined with the second and third embodiments to include a passive distribution unit 260. Further, the fifth embodiment may be combined with the first, third, and fourth embodiments so that the reserved ball can win the special general winning opening 53b by colliding the reserved ball with the game ball. When the fifth embodiment is combined with the third embodiment, the rear guide passage 242a corresponds to the general entry portion portion of the present invention.

(10) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, etc.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.
In addition, the game machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

(B) Invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments The characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

(1) Feature A Group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a winning gaming state, etc., triggered by a game ball launched by a player entering a starting port provided in a gaming area, etc. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state.

Further, it has been proposed that such a game machine is provided with a holding device that accepts and holds a game ball launched by a player and discharges the held game ball toward the game area again (for example). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8813).

However, in such a game machine, there is still room for improvement in the method of using the reserved ball held in the holding device, and by preferably using the holding ball held in the holding device, the player can play the game. It is hoped that interest will increase. The feature A group solves this problem.

Features A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A stage portion (190) having a game ball rolling surface (191, 241, 251) on which the game ball can roll, and
Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player,
A holding device (210) capable of holding up to a predetermined number of the game balls launched toward the game area and discharging the held game balls toward the rolling surface of the game balls.
Holding device opening / closing control means (a function of controlling the holding device driving unit 210c in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that controls the discharge of the game ball held in the holding device based on the operation of the player to the operating means. And with
Assuming that the game ball discharged from the holding device is a holding ball and the game ball that is launched from the launching means and rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball without being held by the holding device is the main game ball. At a predetermined timing when the game ball is rolling on the game ball rolling surface, the player operates the operating means to eject the holding ball from the holding device, so that the holding ball is released from the book. A game machine characterized in that it can collide with a game ball.

According to the feature A1, it is possible to give the player a new game property that the reserved ball collides with the main game ball that rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball.

Feature A2. It has a ball entry portion (first starting port 54, special general winning opening 53b) that is arranged below the stage portion and allows the game ball to enter.
The game ball rolling surface is a location different from the specific location when the main game ball is discharged from a specific location (rear guidance passage 193a, 242a, front guidance passage 196b, 255b) of the gaming ball rolling surface. It is configured so that the probability of entering the ball is higher than when it is discharged from the ball.
When the player operates the operating means to discharge the holding ball from the holding device and causes the holding ball to collide with the main game ball, there is a probability that the main game ball is discharged from the specific location. The gaming machine according to feature A1, which is characterized by being high.

According to the feature A2, by colliding the holding ball with the main game ball, the probability that the main game ball is discharged from a specific position on the rolling surface of the game ball is increased. That is, the probability that the game ball enters the ball entry portion increases. Therefore, the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved.

Features A3. The ball entry portion has a first ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second ball entry portion (special general winning opening 53b) different from the first ball entry portion.
The specific location on the rolling surface of the game ball is a location for the first ball entry portion (rear) in which the probability of entering the first ball entry portion when the main game ball is ejected is higher than other locations. Guidance passages 193a and 242a) and a second entry portion portion (forward guidance passage 196b) in which the probability of entering the second entry portion when the main game ball is ejected is higher than other locations. , 255b), and
Further, an information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S604 and S609 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry unit, and
Grant determination means for executing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information acquisition means corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant information (function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). )When,
The first privilege of granting a privilege game to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the right / wrong information group. Granting means (function to execute open / close execution mode in MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
A second privilege granting means (mainly) that grants a player a privilege different from the first privilege granting means without acquiring the special information based on the main game ball being inserted into the second ball entering portion. The function of transmitting the prize ball command in the MPU 112 of the control device 91), and
When the player operates the operating means, the holding ball is ejected from the holding device, and the holding ball collides with the main game ball, so that the main game ball is released from the second entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature A2, which is characterized in that the probability of being discharged is high.

According to the feature A3, by colliding the holding ball with the main game ball, the probability that the main game ball is discharged from the second entry portion can be increased. That is, when the reserved ball collides with the main game ball, the probability that the main game ball enters the second entry section can be increased, and the player obtains the privilege of entering the second entry section. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second ball entry section, the player can obtain other benefits that do not acquire special information (information used for determining whether or not the game is a hit). Therefore, between the player who executed the game using the reserved ball and the player who did not execute the game using the reserved ball, special information (determination of winning or not) regarding the total number of the launched game balls. It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the probability of obtaining (information used in), and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfair feeling among players.

Features A4. The game ball rolling surface has a holding ball discharging portion (forward guidance passage 197a, 256a) in which the probability that the holding ball is ejected is higher than that of other portions.
Further, when the reserved ball is ejected from the reserved ball ejection portion, the probability of entering the ball is higher than when the reserved ball is ejected from another location different from the reserved ball ejection portion (3rd ball entry portion ( Compensation general winning opening 53c) and
A third privilege granting means (main control) that grants a player a privilege smaller than the second privilege granting means without acquiring the special information based on the reserved ball being inserted into the third ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to feature A3, which comprises (a function of transmitting a prize ball command in the MPU 112 of the device 91).

According to the feature A4, the reserved ball discharged from the reserved ball discharging portion is easily entered into the third entry portion, and the reserved ball is inserted into the third entry portion to play a game. Can get benefits. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game using the reserved ball, and the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved.

Features A5. The second privilege granting means and the third privilege granting means pay out game balls as the privilege, and the second privilege granting means pays out more game balls than the third privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to feature A4.

According to the feature A5, when the main game ball enters the second entry section or the reserved ball enters the third entry section, the player can obtain the payout of the game ball. .. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game using the reserved ball, and the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved. In addition, the player can obtain more game balls when the main game ball enters the second entry section than when the reserved ball enters the third entry section. In addition, the whereabouts of the main game ball after colliding with the reserved ball can be further noticed.

Features A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the grant determination means and the holding device open / close control means are mounted on a common control unit (main control device 91).

According to the feature A6, since the grant determination means and the holding device open / close control means are mounted on the common control unit (main control device 91), the game machine can be made according to the actual situation.

Features A7. The game ball rolling surface extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the game area, and a first mountain portion is formed on one direction side in the left-right direction and a second mountain portion is formed on the other direction side. Is formed as a curved surface, the game ball launched from the launching means is guided from the one direction side of the first mountain portion, and the holding ball discharged from the holding device is said. Guided from the other direction side than the second mountain part,
The first ball entry portion is formed on the top of the first mountain portion, and the second entry portion portion is formed between the first mountain portion and the second mountain portion.
The second ball entry portion is arranged directly below the second ball entry portion in the front view of the game area.
The second mountain portion is a passing prevention means (shape of the second mountain portion 194, second mountain) for preventing the reserved ball from getting over from the other direction side to the one direction side of the second mountain portion. It has the right side surface 194a of the portion 194 and the shape of the lower second mountain portion 253).
When the game ball is likely to be discharged from a portion of the rolling surface of the game ball on the other direction side of the second mountain portion, the player operates the operating means from the holding device. The feature A2 to be characterized in that the probability that the main game ball is discharged from the second entry portion portion is increased by ejecting the reserved ball and causing the reserved ball to collide with the main game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of A6.

According to the feature A7, it has a passing prevention means for preventing the reserved ball from getting over the second mountain portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball from reaching the first entry portion portion or the second entry portion portion. That is, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself from entering the ball entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the holding ball itself from affecting the playability.

Feature A8. The overpass prevention means is a side surface of the second mountain portion on the other direction side.
The side surface on the other direction side is a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the holding ball that passes through the center of the holding ball and intersects with a virtual line parallel to the rolling surface of the game ball, or a portion that intersects the holding ball. The gaming machine according to feature A7, which has a portion in contact with a portion opposite to the rolling surface of the gaming ball.

Feature A9. The second mountain portion is perpendicular to the game ball rolling surface, and the height from the game ball rolling surface is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball. The gaming machine according to feature A8.

According to these features A8 and A9, the passing prevention means is configured by the shape of the second mountain portion. That is, according to the features A8 and A9, the overpass prevention means can be configured with a simple configuration.

Feature A10. The first mountain portion is a passover prevention means (first) for preventing the game ball rolling between the first mountain portion and the second mountain portion from reaching the top of the first mountain portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A7 to A9, which is characterized by having (the right side surface of the mountain portion 193).

According to the feature A10, the game ball has a passing prevention means for preventing the game ball from reaching the top of the first mountain portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main game ball that collides with the reserved ball from entering the first ball entry portion. Therefore, between the player who executed the game using the reserved ball and the player who did not execute the game using the reserved ball, special information regarding the total number of game balls fired (for determining whether or not the game is won). It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the probability of obtaining the information to be used), and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfair feeling among the players.

Feature A11. The game ball rolling surface extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the game area, and the upper game ball ball rolling surface (241) on which the game ball launched from the launching means is guided, and left and right. A part of the game ball that extends in the direction and is arranged below the upper game ball rolling surface and is discharged from the upper game ball rolling surface is guided and discharged from the holding device. Has a lower game ball rolling surface (251) on which the reserved ball is guided.
The first entry portion portion is formed on the upper game ball rolling surface, and the second entry portion portion is formed on the lower game ball rolling surface.
When the game ball is likely to be ejected from a place on the lower game ball rolling surface different from the place for the second ball entry portion, the player operates the operating means to perform the holding ball from the holding device. A2 to A6, which is characterized in that the probability that the main game ball is discharged from the second entry portion portion is increased by causing the reserved ball to collide with the main game ball. The game machine described in one.

According to the feature A11, the first ball entry portion and the second entry portion portion are formed on different rolling surfaces. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself or the main game ball that collides with the reserved ball from entering the first ball entry portion. Therefore, between the player who executed the game using the reserved ball and the player who did not execute the game using the reserved ball, special information regarding the total number of game balls fired (for determining whether or not the game is won). It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the probability of obtaining the information to be used), and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfair feeling among the players. Further, since the first ball entry portion and the second entry portion portion are formed on different rolling surfaces, the degree of freedom in designing the upper gaming ball rolling surface and the lower gaming ball rolling surface. Can be improved.

Feature A12. The path (holding ball guiding passage 220) until the holding ball discharged from the holding device is guided to the game ball rolling surface is provided with an adjusting means (221) for adjusting the speed of the holding ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A11.

According to the feature A12, since the adjusting means for adjusting the speed of the holding ball is provided, when the configuration of the feature A7 or the like is provided, the shape of the passing prevention means can be made to correspond to the adjusting means, and the passing The degree of freedom in designing preventive measures can be improved.

Feature A13. The path (first guide passage 203) until the game ball launched from the launching means is guided to the holding device is provided with an adjusting means (207) for adjusting the speed of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A12.

According to the feature A13, since the adjusting means for adjusting the speed of the game ball until it is guided to the holding device is provided, the game ball does not stay in the holding device when the player operates the operating means. Even when the ball passes, it is possible to prevent the holding ball from becoming too fast. Therefore, when the configuration such as the feature A7 is provided, the shape of the overpass prevention means can be configured to correspond to the adjusting means, and the degree of freedom in designing the overpass prevention means can be improved.

Feature A14. When the predetermined number of game balls are held in the holding device and the game balls launched from the launching means are not held in the holding device, the game balls are held in the game area. Described in any one of the features A1 to A13, characterized in that a predetermined position above the rolling surface or a guiding passage (second guiding passage 204) for guiding to the rolling surface of the game ball is provided. Game machine.

According to the feature A14, even when a new game ball is guided to the holding device when a predetermined number of game balls are held in the holding device, the new game ball is the game ball rolling surface. It is designed so that it may be guided as a main game ball. Therefore, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the holding device, the player does not suffer a significant disadvantage, and the player's interest in the game using the holding ball can be improved. ..

(2) Feature B Group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a winning gaming state, etc., triggered by a game ball launched by a player entering a starting port provided in a gaming area, etc. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state.

Further, it has been proposed that such a game machine is provided with a holding device that accepts and holds a game ball launched by a player and discharges the held game ball toward the game area again (for example). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8813).

However, in such a game machine, there is still room for improvement in the method of guiding the game ball to the holding device, and the player's interest in the game by devising the method of guiding the game ball to the holding device. It is desired to improve. Feature B group solves this problem.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A stage portion (190) having a game ball rolling surface (191, 241, 251) on which the game ball can roll, and
Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player,
A holding device (210) capable of holding up to a predetermined number of the game balls launched toward the game area and discharging the held game balls toward the rolling surface of the game balls.
Holding device opening / closing control means (a function of controlling the holding device driving unit 210c in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that controls the discharge of the game ball held in the holding device based on the operation of the player to the operating means. And with
The game area is provided with a distribution means (passive distribution unit 260) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area is guided to the holding device. Ori,
Assuming that the game ball discharged from the holding device is a holding ball and the game ball that is launched from the launching means and rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball without being held by the holding device is the main game ball. At a predetermined timing when the game ball is rolling on the game ball rolling surface, the player operates the operating means to eject the holding ball from the holding device, so that the holding ball is released from the book. A game machine characterized in that it can collide with a game ball.

According to the feature B1, it is possible to give the player a new game property that the reserved ball collides with the main game ball that rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball. In addition, the game balls launched into the game area are distributed by the sorting means, and a part of them is guided to the holding device. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball is guided to the holding device.

Feature B2. It has a ball entry portion (first starting port 54, special general winning opening 53b) that is arranged below the stage portion and allows the game ball to enter.
The game ball rolling surface is a location different from the specific location when the main game ball is discharged from a specific location (rear guidance passage 193a, 242a, front guidance passage 196b, 255b) of the gaming ball rolling surface. It is configured so that the probability of entering the ball is higher than when it is discharged from the ball.
When the player operates the operating means to discharge the holding ball from the holding device and causes the holding ball to collide with the main game ball, there is a probability that the main game ball is discharged from the specific location. The gaming machine according to feature B1, which is characterized by being high.

According to the feature B2, by colliding the holding ball with the main game ball, the probability that the main game ball is discharged from a specific position on the rolling surface of the game ball is increased. That is, the probability that the game ball enters the ball entry portion increases. Therefore, the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved.

Feature B3. The ball entry portion has a first ball entry portion (first start port 54) and a second ball entry portion (special general winning opening 53b) different from the first ball entry portion.
The specific location on the rolling surface of the game ball is a location for the first ball entry portion (rear) in which the probability of entering the first ball entry portion when the main game ball is ejected is higher than other locations. Guidance passages 193a and 242a) and a second entry portion portion (forward guidance passage 196b) in which the probability of entering the second entry portion when the main game ball is ejected is higher than other locations. , 255b), and
Further, an information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S604 and S609 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry unit, and
Grant determination means for executing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information acquisition means corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant information (function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). )When,
The first privilege of granting a privilege game to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the right / wrong information group. Granting means (function to execute open / close execution mode in MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
A second privilege granting means (mainly) that grants a player a privilege different from the first privilege granting means without acquiring the special information based on the main game ball being inserted into the second ball entering portion. The function of transmitting the prize ball command in the MPU 112 of the control device 91), and
When the player operates the operating means, the holding ball is ejected from the holding device, and the holding ball collides with the main game ball, so that the main game ball is released from the second entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized in that the probability of being discharged is high.

According to the feature B3, by colliding the holding ball with the main game ball, the probability that the main game ball is discharged from the second entry portion can be increased. That is, when the reserved ball collides with the main game ball, the probability that the main game ball enters the second entry section can be increased, and the player obtains the privilege of entering the second entry section. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball.

Feature B4. The game region has a first region (RS) through which the game ball launched from the launching means can flow down, and a second region (RT) different from the first region, and the grant determination means said. When the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied, the game ball launched from the launching means flows down the second region, which gives the player a privilege (executes the normal power control process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). It is configured to give a function to perform and a ball to the variable winning device 56).
The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the sorting means is provided in the second region.

According to the feature B4, the distribution means is provided in the second area where the player can obtain the privilege when the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied. That is, when the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied, the player can guide the game ball to the holding device while obtaining the privilege. Therefore, the expectation for the grant determination of the grant determination means can be further improved. Further, if the condition based on the grant determination is not satisfied, even if the player fires the game ball in the second region and guides the game ball to the holding device, the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied. It will be more disadvantageous than if you guide the game ball to the holding device while getting the privilege. Therefore, before the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied, the player's willingness to guide the game ball to the holding device is diminished, and the holding device (holding ball) is used before the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied. It is possible to prevent cheating from being carried out.

Feature B5. The condition based on the grant determination of the grant determination means is described in feature B4, wherein the grant determination means determines that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group. Game machine.

According to the feature B5, when it is determined that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group (during the open / close execution mode), the player executes the privilege game by firing the game ball in the second area. The game ball can be guided to the holding device via the sorting means. Therefore, the expectation for the grant determination of the grant determination means can be further improved.

Feature B6. The first game mode (high probability mode or high probability mode) determines the grant determination for a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) from the time when the grant determination means determines that the hit / fail information group is supported (open / close execution mode). (Frequency support mode), and if the grant determination when not in the first game mode is set to the second game mode (for example, low probability mode or low frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to feature B4 or feature B5, wherein the condition based on the grant determination of the grant determination means is the first game mode.

According to the feature B6, the player obtains a privilege by firing a game ball in the second area for a specified number of times from the time when the special information is determined to correspond to the hit / miss information group, and distributes the information. The game ball can be guided to the holding device via means. Therefore, the expectation for the grant determination of the grant determination means can be further improved.

Feature B7. The second region has a guide region (R1) leading to the holding device and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. Any one of features B4 to B6, which is characterized by having a distribution member (261) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game ball in the first circumferential direction and rotating the game ball to a predetermined angle. The game machine described in one.

According to the feature B7, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature B8. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature B7, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature B8, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the holding device can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature B9. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 268) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive unit (first accommodating unit 268) that receives the game ball, and
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 270, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature B7 or B8, which comprises a passive distribution member side magnet 264a).

According to the feature B9, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, it is possible to suppress rotation without receiving the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Feature B10. The game ball rolling surface has a holding ball discharging portion (forward guidance passage 197a, 256a) in which the probability that the holding ball is ejected is higher than that of other portions.
Further, when the reserved ball is ejected from the reserved ball ejection portion, the probability of entering the ball is higher than when the reserved ball is ejected from another location different from the reserved ball ejection portion (3rd ball entry portion ( Compensation general winning opening 53c) and
A third privilege granting means (main control) that grants a player a privilege smaller than the second privilege granting means without acquiring the special information based on the reserved ball being inserted into the third ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B9, which comprises a function of transmitting a prize ball command in the MPU 112 of the device 91).

According to the feature B10, the reserved ball discharged from the reserved ball discharging portion is easily entered into the third entry portion, and the reserved ball is inserted into the third entry portion to play a game. One can get benefits. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game using the reserved ball, and the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved.

Feature B11. The second privilege granting means and the third privilege granting means pay out game balls as the privilege, and the second privilege granting means pays out more game balls than the third privilege granting means. The gaming machine according to feature B11.

According to the feature B11, when the main game ball enters the second entry section or the reserved ball enters the third entry section, the player can obtain the payout of the game ball. .. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game using the reserved ball, and the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved. In addition, the player can obtain more game balls when the main game ball enters the second entry section than when the reserved ball enters the third entry section. In addition, the whereabouts of the main game ball after colliding with the reserved ball can be further noticed.

Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B11, wherein the grant determination means and the holding device open / close control means are mounted on a common control unit (main control device 91).

According to the feature B12, since the grant determination means and the holding device opening / closing control means are mounted on the common control unit (main control device 91), the gaming machine can be made according to the actual situation.

Feature B13. The game ball rolling surface extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the game area, and a first mountain portion is formed on one direction side in the left-right direction and a second mountain portion is formed on the other direction side. Is formed as a curved surface, the game ball launched from the launching means is guided from the one direction side of the first mountain portion, and the holding ball discharged from the holding device is said. Guided from the other direction side than the second mountain part,
The first ball entry portion is formed on the top of the first mountain portion, and the second entry portion portion is formed between the first mountain portion and the second mountain portion.
The second ball entry portion is arranged directly below the second ball entry portion in the front view of the game area.
The second mountain portion is a passing prevention means (shape of the second mountain portion 194, second mountain) for preventing the reserved ball from getting over from the other direction side to the one direction side of the second mountain portion. It has the right side surface 194a of the portion 194 and the shape of the lower second mountain portion 253).
When the game ball is likely to be discharged from a portion of the rolling surface of the game ball on the other direction side of the second mountain portion, the player operates the operating means from the holding device. The feature B2 to be characterized in that the probability that the main game ball is discharged from the second entry portion portion is increased by discharging the reserved ball and causing the reserved ball to collide with the main game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of B12.

According to the feature B13, it has a passing prevention means for preventing the reserved ball from getting over the second mountain portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball from reaching the first entry portion portion or the second entry portion portion. That is, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself from entering the ball entry portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the holding ball itself from affecting the playability.

Further, in the feature B13, the game ball launched from the launching means is guided to the game ball rolling surface from one direction side, and the holding ball discharged from the holding device is guided from the other direction side to the game ball rolling surface. Is guided to. That is, when the configuration such as the feature B4 is provided, the game ball launched toward the first region is guided to the game ball rolling surface from one direction side, and the hold ball discharged from the holding device is on the other direction side. Is guided to the rolling surface of the game ball. The holding device can hold the game ball by firing the game ball toward the second region. For this reason, in the game of colliding the reserved ball with the main game ball, the player holds the game ball in the holding device while obtaining a privilege by firing the game ball toward the second area, and then the player first. By launching the game ball toward one area, it can be executed when the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to continue the game even after the player has obtained the privilege, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Feature B14. The overpass prevention means is a side surface of the second mountain portion on the other direction side.
The side surface on the other direction side is a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the holding ball that passes through the center of the holding ball and intersects with a virtual line parallel to the rolling surface of the game ball, or a portion that intersects the holding ball. The gaming machine according to feature B13, which has a portion in contact with a portion opposite to the rolling surface of the gaming ball.

Feature B15. The second mountain portion is perpendicular to the game ball rolling surface, and the height from the game ball rolling surface is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball. The gaming machine according to feature B14.

According to these features B14 and B15, the overpass prevention means is configured in the shape of the second mountain portion. That is, according to the features B14 and B15, the overpass prevention means can be configured with a simple configuration.

Feature B16. The first mountain portion is a passover prevention means (first) for preventing the game ball rolling between the first mountain portion and the second mountain portion from reaching the top of the first mountain portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B13 to B15, which is characterized by having (the right side surface of the mountain portion 193).

According to the feature B16, the game ball has a passing prevention means for preventing the game ball from reaching the top of the first mountain portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main game ball that collides with the reserved ball from entering the first ball entry portion. Therefore, between the player who executed the game using the reserved ball and the player who did not execute the game using the reserved ball, special information regarding the total number of game balls fired (for determining whether or not the game is won). It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the probability of obtaining the information to be used), and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfair feeling among the players.

Feature B17. The game ball rolling surface extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the game area, and the upper game ball ball rolling surface (241) on which the game ball launched from the launching means is guided, and left and right. A part of the game ball that extends in the direction and is arranged below the upper game ball rolling surface and is discharged from the upper game ball rolling surface is guided and discharged from the holding device. Has a lower game ball rolling surface (251) on which the reserved ball is guided.
The first entry portion portion is formed on the upper game ball rolling surface, and the second entry portion portion is formed on the lower game ball rolling surface.
When the game ball is likely to be ejected from a place on the lower game ball rolling surface different from the place for the second ball entry portion, the player operates the operating means to perform the holding ball from the holding device. B2 to B12, which is characterized in that the probability that the main game ball is discharged from the second entry portion portion is increased by causing the reserved ball to collide with the main game ball. The game machine described in one.

According to the feature B17, the portion for the first ball entry portion and the portion for the second ball entry portion are formed on different rolling surfaces. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself or the main game ball that collides with the reserved ball from entering the first ball entry portion. Therefore, between the player who executed the game using the reserved ball and the player who did not execute the game using the reserved ball, special information regarding the total number of game balls fired (for determining whether or not the game is won). It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the probability of obtaining the information to be used), and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfair feeling among the players. Further, since the first ball entry portion and the second entry portion portion are formed on different rolling surfaces, the degree of freedom in designing the upper gaming ball rolling surface and the lower gaming ball rolling surface. Can be improved.

Feature B18. The path (holding ball guiding passage 220) until the holding ball discharged from the holding device is guided to the game ball rolling surface is provided with an adjusting means (221) for adjusting the speed of the holding ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B17.

According to the feature B18, since the adjusting means for adjusting the speed of the holding ball is provided, when the configuration of the feature B13 or the like is provided, the shape of the passing prevention means can be made to correspond to the adjusting means, and the passing The degree of freedom in designing preventive measures can be improved.

Feature B19. The path (first guide passage 203) until the game ball launched from the launching means is guided to the holding device is provided with an adjusting means (207) for adjusting the speed of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B18.

According to the feature B19, since the adjusting means for adjusting the speed of the game ball until it is guided to the holding device is provided, the game ball does not stay in the holding device when the player operates the operating means. Even when the ball passes, it is possible to prevent the holding ball from becoming too fast. Therefore, when the configuration such as the feature B13 is provided, the shape of the overpass prevention means can be configured to correspond to the adjusting means, and the degree of freedom in designing the overpass prevention means can be improved.

(3) Feature C group Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a hit gaming state, etc., triggered by a game ball launched by a player entering a starting port provided in a gaming area, etc. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state.

Further, it has been proposed that such a game machine is provided with a holding device that receives and holds a game ball launched by a player and discharges the held game ball toward the game area again (for example,). Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-8813).

However, in such a game machine, there is still room for improvement in the method of using the reserved ball held in the holding device, and by preferably using the holding ball held in the holding device, the player can play the game. It is hoped that interest will increase. Feature C group solves this problem.

Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 44) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A stage portion (190) having a game ball rolling surface (191, 241, 251) on which the game ball can roll, and
Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player,
A holding device (210) capable of holding up to a predetermined number of the game balls launched toward the game area and discharging the held game balls toward the rolling surface of the game balls.
Holding device opening / closing control means (a function of controlling the holding device driving unit 210c in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) that controls the discharge of the game ball held in the holding device based on the operation of the player to the operating means. And with
Below the stage portion, a special entry portion (special general winning opening 53b) in which the game ball can enter is arranged.
Assuming that the game ball discharged from the holding device is a holding ball, and the game ball that is launched from the launching means and rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball without being held by the holding device is the main game ball.
When the reserved ball is discharged from a specific location (forward guidance passage 197b) of the game ball rolling surface, the game ball rolling surface is specially inserted as compared with the case where the reserved ball is ejected from a location different from the specific location. It is configured to increase the probability of entering the ball part,
At a predetermined timing when the game ball is rolling on the game ball rolling surface, the player operates the operating means to eject the hold ball from the hold device, and the hold ball is released from the book. A game machine characterized in that the probability that the reserved ball is discharged from the specific location is increased by colliding with the game ball.

According to the feature C1, it is possible to give the player a new game property that the reserved ball collides with the main game ball that rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball. Further, according to the feature C1, by colliding the reserved ball with the main game ball, the probability that the reserved ball is discharged from a specific position on the rolling surface of the game ball is increased. That is, the probability that the reserved ball will enter the special entry section is high. Therefore, the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved.

Feature C2. Having a special privilege granting means (a function of transmitting a prize ball command in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for paying out a game ball to a player based on the reserved ball being inserted into the special ball entry unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the feature C2, the player can obtain the payout of the game ball by the reserved ball entering the special ball entry section. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game using the reserved ball, and the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved.

Feature C3. Below the stage portion, a general entry portion (first starting port 54) different from the special entry portion is arranged.
The game ball rolling surface is discharged from a special entry portion portion (197b) as the specific location and a probability of entering the general entry portion when the main game ball is ejected from other locations. It has a general entry section portion (rear guidance passage 193a, 242a), which is higher than the case where the ball is inserted.
Further, an information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of S604 and S609 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the entry of the game ball into the general entry unit, and
Grant determination means for executing grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information acquisition means corresponds to the pass / fail information group in the grant information (function of executing the special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). )When,
A general privilege grant that grants a privilege game to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a grant correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the right / wrong information group. Means (a function of executing the open / close execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) and
The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the special privilege granting means does not acquire the special information.

According to the feature C3, since the special privilege giving means does not acquire special information (information used for determining whether or not the player wins), the player who executed the game using the reserved ball and the game using the reserved ball It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the probability of obtaining special information (information used for determining whether or not a hit is made) for the total number of fired game balls with a player who did not execute the above, and among the players. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unfairness.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the grant determination means and the holding device open / close control means are mounted on a common control unit (main control device 91).

According to the feature C4, since the grant determination means and the holding device open / close control means are mounted on the common control unit (main control device 91), the game machine can be made according to the actual situation.

Feature C5. The game area is provided with a distribution means (passive distribution unit 260) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area is guided to the holding device. The gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, which is characterized by being present.

According to the feature C5, the game ball launched into the game area is distributed by the distribution means and a part of the game ball is guided to the holding device. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball is guided to the holding device.

Feature C6. The game region has a first region (RS) through which the game ball launched from the launching means can flow down, and a second region (RT) different from the first region, and the grant determination means said. When the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied, the game ball launched from the launching means flows down the second region, which gives the player a privilege (executes the normal power control process in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91). It is configured to give a function to perform and a ball to the variable winning device 56).
The second region is provided with a distribution means (passive distribution unit 260) for distributing the game balls so that a part of the game balls launched toward the game area is guided to the holding device. The gaming machine according to feature C5, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature C6, the distribution means is provided in the second area where the player can obtain the privilege when the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied. That is, when the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied, the player can guide the game ball to the holding device while obtaining the privilege. Therefore, the expectation for the grant determination of the grant determination means can be further improved. Further, if the condition based on the grant determination is not satisfied, even if the player fires the game ball in the second region and guides the game ball to the holding device, the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied. It will be more disadvantageous than if you guide the game ball to the holding device while getting the privilege. Therefore, before the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied, the player's willingness to guide the game ball to the holding device is diminished, and the holding device (holding ball) is used before the condition based on the grant determination is satisfied. It is possible to prevent cheating from being carried out.

Feature C7. The condition based on the grant determination of the grant determination means is described in feature C6, wherein the grant determination means determines that the special information corresponds to the pass / fail information group. Game machine.

According to the feature C7, when it is determined that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group (during the open / close execution mode), the player executes the privilege game by firing the game ball in the second area. The game ball can be guided to the holding device via the sorting means. Therefore, the expectation for the grant determination of the grant determination means can be further improved.

Feature C8. The first game mode (high probability mode or high probability mode) determines the grant determination for a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) from the time when the grant determination means determines that the hit / fail information group is supported (open / close execution mode). Frequency support mode), and if the grant determination when not in the first game mode is the second game mode (for example, low probability mode or low frequency support mode),
The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the condition based on the grant determination of the grant determination means is the first game mode.

According to the feature C6, during the specified number of times since it is determined that the special information corresponds to the hit / miss information group, the player obtains a privilege by firing the game ball in the second area and distributes the information. The game ball can be guided to the holding device via means. Therefore, the expectation for the grant determination of the grant determination means can be further improved.

Feature C9. The second region has a guide region (R1) leading to the holding device and a discharge region (R2) different from the guide region.
The distribution means is arranged in the game area in a rotatable state, receives the game ball launched from the launching means in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball in the first circumferential direction. The game ball is guided to the guide region by rotating to a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction on the opposite side to the above, and the game ball launched from the launching means is rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. Any one of the features C5 to C8, which is characterized by having a distribution member (261) that guides the game ball in the discharge region by receiving the game ball in the first circumferential direction and rotating the game ball to a predetermined angle. The game machine described in one.

According to the feature C9, the game ball can be distributed by the distribution member common to the guide area or the discharge area. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where the member for guiding the game ball to the guide area side and the member for guiding the game ball to the discharge area side are separately provided.

Feature C10. The distribution means is configured by disposing a plurality of the distribution members along the flow direction of the game ball.
The plurality of distribution members receive the game ball in a state where the distribution member on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball rotates the game ball by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and receives the game ball at a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. By guiding the game ball to the guide region by rotating to, the distribution member on the downstream side rotates the game ball in the first circumferential direction, or rotates in the second circumferential direction. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which is arranged so that it can be received in a moving state.

According to the feature C10, the game ball is guided from the distribution member on the upstream side to the guide region side, so that the game ball is guided to the distribution member on the downstream side. Therefore, the number of distribution paths of the game ball can be easily changed by appropriately changing the number of distribution members to be arranged (assuming that the number of distribution members is n, the number of distribution paths is 2. The probability of the game ball guided to the holding device can be easily changed according to the game machine.

Feature C11. The distribution member has a first passive portion (first accommodating portion 268) that receives the game ball in a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the first circumferential direction, and a state of being rotated by a predetermined angle in the second circumferential direction. It has a second passive unit (first accommodating unit 268) that receives the game ball, and
In the distribution means, after the first passive portion rotates in the second circumferential direction and the game ball is received by the second passive portion, the game ball is placed in the second passive portion. The second passive portion prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the first circumferential direction before being accepted, and the second passive portion rotates in the first circumferential direction so that the game ball is placed on the first passive portion. Rotation regulating means (base side magnet 270, which prevents the first passive portion from rotating in the second circumferential direction before the game ball is accepted by the first passive portion after the acceptance state is reached. The gaming machine according to feature C9 or C10, which comprises a passive distribution member side magnet 264a).

According to the feature C11, since the rotation regulating means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball and before the next game ball. Is suppressed. That is, it is possible to suppress rotation without receiving the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is continuously guided to the guide area or the discharge area.

Feature C12. The game ball rolling surface is a curved surface that extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the game area and has a mountain portion (194) formed at a predetermined position, and the game is launched from the launching means. The sphere is guided from one direction side in the left-right direction of the mountain portion, and the holding ball discharged from the holding device is guided from the other direction side in the left-right direction of the mountain portion.
The special entry portion portion is formed on the other side of the mountain portion, and the general entry portion portion is formed on the one side of the mountain portion.
Probability that the reserved ball is ejected from the special entry portion by colliding the reserved ball with the main game ball when the main game ball is located on the other direction side of the mountain portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C11, which is characterized in that the value is high.

According to the feature C12, a general entry portion portion is formed on one direction in which the main game ball is guided on the rolling surface of the game ball, and the holding ball is guided on the rolling surface of the game ball. A special ball entry part is formed on the direction side of. Therefore, it is possible to easily design a shape that suppresses the main game ball from being ejected from the special entry portion and also suppresses the reserved ball from being ejected from the general entry portion.

Further, in the feature C12, the game ball launched from the launching means is guided to the game ball rolling surface from one direction side, and the holding ball discharged from the holding device is guided from the other direction side to the game ball rolling surface. Is guided to. That is, when the configuration such as feature C6 is provided, the game ball launched toward the first region is guided to the game ball rolling surface from one direction side, and the hold ball discharged from the holding device is on the other direction side. Is guided to the rolling surface of the game ball. The holding device can hold the game ball by firing the game ball toward the second region. For this reason, in the game of colliding the reserved ball with the main game ball, the player holds the game ball in the holding device while obtaining a privilege by firing the game ball toward the second area, and then the player first. By launching the game ball toward one area, it can be executed when the game ball is guided to the game ball rolling surface. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation of the player to continue the game even after the player has obtained the privilege, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Feature C13. When the game ball gets over the mountain portion from one direction side to the other direction side of the mountain portion, the game ball rolling surface is discharged from the special entry portion portion. The gaming machine according to feature C12, characterized in that it has an emission suppressing means (inclined surface 197c of the third valley portion 197).

According to the feature C13, even if the main game ball gets over the mountain portion from one direction side to the other direction side, the main game ball is prevented from being discharged from the special entry portion as it is. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the game using the reserved ball, and the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball can be further improved. Feature C14. The discharge suppressing means is configured such that between the mountain portion and the special entry portion portion is an inclined surface that descends from the special entry portion portion toward the mountain portion side. The gaming machine according to feature C13.

According to the feature C14, the discharge suppressing means is formed by forming an inclined surface between the mountain portion and the portion for the ball entry portion. Therefore, as compared with the case where the discharge suppressing means is configured by providing a new separate member on the rolling surface of the game ball, the discharge suppressing means can be configured with a simple configuration, and the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

Feature C15. The mountain portion is a passing prevention means (shape of the second mountain portion 194, right side of the second mountain portion 194) for preventing the reserved ball from getting over from the other direction side to the one direction side of the mountain portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features C12 to C14, which has a side surface 194a and a shape of a lower second mountain portion 253).

According to the feature C15, it has a passing prevention means for preventing the reserved ball from getting over the mountain portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball from being discharged from the general entry portion. That is, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself from entering the general ball entry section. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the holding ball itself from affecting the playability.

Feature C16. The overpass prevention means is a side surface of the mountain portion on the other direction side.
The side surface on the other direction side is a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the holding ball that passes through the center of the holding ball and intersects with a virtual line parallel to the rolling surface of the game ball, or a portion that intersects the holding ball. The gaming machine according to feature C15, which has a portion in contact with a portion opposite to the rolling surface of the gaming ball.

Feature C17. The mountain portion is perpendicular to the rolling surface of the game ball, and the height from the rolling surface of the game ball is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball. The gaming machine described in.

According to these C16 and C17, the overpass prevention means is configured by the shape of the mountain portion. That is, according to the features C16 and C17, the overpass prevention means can be configured with a simple configuration.

Feature C18. The game ball rolling surface extends in the left-right direction in the front view of the game area, and the upper game ball ball rolling surface (241) on which the game ball launched from the launching means is guided, and left and right. A part of the game ball that extends in the direction and is arranged below the upper game ball rolling surface and is discharged from the upper game ball rolling surface is guided and discharged from the holding device. Has a lower game ball rolling surface (251) on which the reserved ball is guided.
The general entry portion portion is formed on the upper game ball rolling surface, and the special entry portion portion is formed on the lower game ball rolling surface.
When the game ball is guided to the rolling surface of the lower game ball, the player operates the operating means to eject the hold ball from the holding device, and the holding ball is placed on the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C11, wherein the holding ball has a high probability of being discharged from the special entry portion portion by colliding with the ball.

According to the feature C18, the general entry portion portion and the special entry portion portion are formed on different rolling surfaces. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved ball itself or the main game ball that collides with the reserved ball from entering the general entry portion. Therefore, between the player who executed the game using the reserved ball and the player who did not execute the game using the reserved ball, special information regarding the total number of game balls fired (for determining whether or not the game is won). It is possible to suppress a large fluctuation in the probability of obtaining the information to be used), and it is also possible to suppress the occurrence of an unfair feeling among the players. Furthermore, since the general entry section portion and the special entry section portion are formed on different rolling surfaces, the degree of freedom in designing the upper gaming ball rolling surface and the lower gaming ball rolling surface is improved. it can.

Feature C19. The path (holding ball guiding passage 220) until the holding ball discharged from the holding device is guided to the game ball rolling surface is provided with an adjusting means (221) for adjusting the speed of the holding ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C18.

According to the feature C19, since the adjusting means for adjusting the speed of the holding ball is provided, the shape of the passing prevention means can be made to correspond to the adjusting means when the configuration of the feature C15 or the like is provided. The degree of freedom in designing preventive measures can be improved.

Feature C20. The path (first guide passage 203) until the game ball launched from the launching means is guided to the holding device is provided with an adjusting means (207) for adjusting the speed of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C19.

According to the feature C20, since the adjusting means for adjusting the speed of the game ball until it is guided to the holding device is provided, the game ball does not stay in the holding device by the player operating the operating means. Even when the ball passes, it is possible to prevent the holding ball from becoming too fast. Therefore, when the configuration such as the feature C15 is provided, the shape of the overpass prevention means can be configured to correspond to the adjusting means, and the degree of freedom in designing the overpass prevention means can be improved.

Feature C21. When the predetermined number of game balls are held in the holding device and the game balls launched from the launching means are not held in the holding device, the game balls are placed in the game area. Described in any one of the features C1 to C20 characterized in that a predetermined position above the rolling surface or a guiding passage (second guiding passage 204) for guiding to the rolling surface of the game ball is provided. Game machine.

According to the feature C21, even when a new game ball is guided to the holding device when a predetermined number of game balls are held in the holding device, the new game ball is the game ball rolling surface. It is designed so that it may be guided as a main game ball. Therefore, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the holding device, the player does not suffer a significant disadvantage, and the player's interest in the game using the holding ball can be improved. ..

Further, the basic configuration of the game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area and gives a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating game machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.
<Other>
Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a gaming ball launched by a player enters a starting port provided in a gaming area, the game shifts to a predetermined gaming state such as a hit gaming state. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to let them.
Further, in such a game machine, one provided with a holding device for receiving and holding a game ball launched by a player and discharging the held game ball to the game area again has been proposed (for example, Patent Document). 1: JP-A-2015-8813).
However, in such a game machine, there is still room for improvement in the method of guiding the game ball to the holding device, and the player's interest in the game by devising the method of guiding the game ball to the holding device. It is desired to improve.
In view of the above points, the present technical idea aims to provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily increasing the degree of attention to the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve the above object, in the game machine of the technical idea 1, a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area, a stage portion having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and a player It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of game balls launched toward the game area, as well as a holding device that discharges the held game balls toward the game ball rolling surface, and a game. A holding device opening / closing control means for controlling the discharge of the game ball held in the holding device based on the operation of the operating means of the person is provided, and the game area includes the game ball launched toward the game area. A distribution means for distributing the game ball so that a part of the game ball is guided to the holding device is provided. The game ball discharged from the holding device is used as a holding ball, and the game ball is fired from the launching means and is not held by the holding device. Assuming that the game ball that rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball is the main game ball, the player operates the operating means to hold the game ball at a predetermined timing when the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface of the game ball. By ejecting the reserved ball from the device, it is possible to make the reserved ball collide with the main game ball.
<Effect>
According to this, it is possible to give the player a new game property that the reserved ball collides with the main game ball that rolls on the rolling surface of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game using the reserved ball. In addition, the game balls launched into the game area are distributed by the sorting means, and a part of them is guided to the holding device. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the process until the game ball is guided to the holding device.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
44 Game ball launch mechanism (launching means)
53b Special general winning opening (ball entry means)
190 stage part
191 game ball rolling surface
210 Holding device (regulatory means)

Claims (1)

A launching means that launches a game ball toward the game area,
A stage portion having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll,
The first state that regulates the game ball launched toward the game area to flow down toward the game ball rolling surface, and the game ball regulated by the first state rolls the game ball. A second state that can flow down toward the surface, a variable regulatory measure, and
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
In a gaming machine having a variable control means capable of variably controlling the regulation means .
The game area is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls so that at least a part of the game balls launched toward the game area is guided to the regulation means.
The stage portion has a first rolling surface and a second rolling surface on which the game ball can roll.
At the boundary between the first rolling surface and the second rolling surface, a game ball that has flowed down to the second rolling surface due to the regulation means being changed to the second state is the first rolling. There is a regulatory department that regulates the inflow to the surface,
The gaming machine is
When the regulating means changes from the first state to the second state at a predetermined timing when the gaming ball that has flowed down without being regulated by the regulating means is rolling on the second rolling surface. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down from the regulating means to the second rolling surface is made to collide with the game ball that is rolling on the second rolling surface, so that the game ball has flowed down without being regulated by the regulating means. It is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the first rolling surface.
A game ball that has flowed down below the first rolling surface may be given a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball that has flowed down below the second rolling surface enters the ball more than the game ball that has flowed down below the second rolling surface. It is easy to enter the possible ball entry means,
The variable control means is a gaming machine characterized in that when a specific operation is executed on the operating means, the regulating means is variably controlled from the first state to the second state. ..

Images